JP2014195677A - Game system - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system in which a game player who is playing a game with a game machine can see display without largely moving the sight line of the game player while solving the problem on security which is caused by distributing data to the game machine.SOLUTION: When a CU controls a display device provided in a P stand, the CU downloads image data for display by the display device from a security center server (S805), and controls the display device using the image data.

Description

  A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result, and the gaming machine is connected to be communicable with the gaming machine The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming device.

  Conventionally, this type of gaming system is configured so that image data to be displayed on a gaming machine can be downloaded from a data distribution device, which is a host device, to the gaming machine, and the downloaded image data can be displayed on the gaming machine. There was a thing (patent document 1). In the device described in Patent Document 1, image data can be downloaded and used at any time only when the gaming machine is used without increasing the memory for storing image data.

  Further, conventionally, there has been a configuration in which an effect display of a gaming machine is displayed in a pseudo manner on a display of the gaming device when the ball lending amount by the gaming device exceeds a predetermined amount (Patent Document 2, Patent Document 3).

  Further, conventionally, there has been a configuration in which content selected by a player can be distributed from a higher-level server to a gaming device and displayed on the gaming device (Patent Document 4).

JP 2004-187789 A JP 2000-334156 A JP 2003-47758 A Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-40279

  Although there has been a conventional method of switching the type of display effect of a gaming machine, there is a problem that a security problem occurs when data is distributed to a gaming machine as in Patent Document 1, and it takes time to download image data. There was a drawback that a problem occurred in the processing speed.

  On the other hand, when a display is provided on a display device provided in a gaming device, such as those described in Patent Literature 2 to Patent Literature 4, a player playing a game on a gaming machine changes from the gaming machine to the gaming device. It is necessary to move the line of sight greatly to see the display on the display, and there is a drawback that the player often does not see the display on the display after all.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to play a game on a gaming machine while solving the security problem and the processing speed problem caused by distributing data to the gaming machine. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system in which a player can see a display without greatly moving his / her line of sight.

(1) According to the present invention, a specific display result (for example, a double eye, a combination is established) in which a display result of variable display of identification information in a variable display device (variable display device 278, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is predetermined. A game machine (P 2 and S 2S) that shifts to a specific game state (a big win state, winning) that is advantageous to the player when it is a combination of symbols, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3),
The gaming machine is
A display device (display devices 54, 510) different from the variable display device;
Transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting variable display information in the variable display device (game information / type information in FIG. 15) to the game device;
The gaming device is:
Display control means for controlling the display device to variably display predetermined information based on the variable display information transmitted from the transmission means, and for performing the effect control of the type selected by the operation of selecting the effect type. Display control unit 350, S810 to S815, S820 to S825),
Receiving means (S800, S801, S803, S806) for receiving image data necessary for presentation control of the display device from a server,
The display control means performs effect control using the image data received by the receiving means (S820).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming device connected to be able to communicate with the gaming machine receives the image data from the server, a security problem occurs when the image data is distributed to the gaming machine. And the processing speed of the gaming machine can be secured. In addition, since the display device that performs the effect display using the image data received from the server is provided in the gaming machine, the display device does not greatly change the line of sight of the player playing the game on the gaming machine. Can be visually recognized, and the player's attention can be effectively drawn by the display on the display device. Furthermore, since the types of effects selected by the operation of selecting the types of effects are displayed on the display device, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects on the display device.

  (2) In the gaming system according to (1), the display control means performs a control to display on the display device a display result corresponding to the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device. Control means (S822-S825) are included.

  According to such a configuration, since the display result corresponding to the display result of the variable display device is displayed on the display device, the display results of the variable display device and the display device can be made consistent and variable. The display device and the display device can be linked to each other.

(3) In the gaming system according to (1), the display control means is also configured to perform predetermined processing when a display result of variable display of identification information in the variable display device is an outlier display result other than the specific display result. Winning display control means (S835, S836) for controlling the display device to display a display result indicating that the lottery is won,
The gaming device controls to give a predetermined content to the player when a display result indicating that a predetermined lottery is won is displayed on the display device (S837).

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the game of the gaming machine itself, the player's attention can be drawn and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display control means is configured such that the variable display history in the variable display device is a predetermined condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches the tenth time) When the condition is satisfied, variable display of the predetermined information on the display device is started (S814).

  According to such a configuration, since the variable display history in the variable display device satisfies the predetermined condition, the variable display of the predetermined information by the display device is started, so that it is possible to prevent the customer from leaving.

  (5) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (4), the gaming device distributes the image data corresponding to a maker of the gaming machine at the first connection with the gaming machine. Distribution request means for requesting the server (display data acquisition sequence in FIG. 33, S800) is included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that other control processing of the gaming apparatus is delayed when image data is distributed as needed.

  (6) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the gaming device controls the display device according to a model of the gaming machine at the first connection with the gaming machine. The model corresponding process is executed (S807).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to apply an effect according to the model of the gaming machine as a result of the model corresponding process, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

  (7) In the gaming system of the above (1) to (6), the gaming device requests control data for the display device corresponding to the model of the gaming machine to the server (model shown in FIG. 76). Display data including corresponding data is requested to the security center server 802 in S803).

  According to such a configuration, the display device control data corresponding to the gaming machine model can be downloaded from the server to the gaming device, and the display device corresponding to the gaming machine model can be controlled. Can be improved.

  (8) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (7), the gaming device sets control data for the display device corresponding to a model of the gaming machine (setting of a scaler in S807) etc).

  According to such a configuration, the game device can control the display device after setting the control data for the display device corresponding to the model of the gaming machine, and an effect according to the model of the gaming machine can be provided. It can be applied and the production effect can be improved.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a CU state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information response. It is explanatory drawing explaining the meaning of various numbers of balls, and the content of the confirmation point. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game machine state 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game machine state 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the classification information in game information. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the prize ball information in game information. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the card insertion notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card insertion response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the card return notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card return response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a recovery request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery process of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication termination request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication end response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication test request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication test response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of money_receiving | payment to the inserted card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when subtracting a part of game ball. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when subtracting all the game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning the inserted card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case a count operation is prompted when the return operation of the inserted card is detected. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when collect | recovering the inserted card | curd automatically. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting operation is detected during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of the possession ball sharing process performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the wagon service process performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the example of a combination of the structure of the system for games. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of the system for games when a game ball is more than predetermined number. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship with the game board and game frame (front frame) of a pachinko machine about fraud detection processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the information transmitted from the main control board with respect to the information request | requirement of a payout control board, in order to perform a fraud detection process. It is a flowchart which shows control of the fraud detection process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart showing the fraud detection process in a game. It is an example of the dollar box display performed with the indicator of a card unit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation process of the re-play button of FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation process of a count button. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of count operation. It is a flowchart for demonstrating control of the payout control part and CU control part by a radio wave sensor. It is a figure which shows an example of the display data acquisition sequence. (A) is a flowchart which shows the display control of the indicator by a card unit, (b) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the variable display control process of (a). It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a variable display control process. (A) is a flowchart of display data processing by the security center server, (b) is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of registration processing from the manufacturer of (a), and (c) is a marketplace operation of (a). It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of a process. It is a block diagram which shows the whole marketplace system. It is a flowchart which shows the marketplace browsing process in the management computer for halls installed in the game hall. It is a screen figure which shows the website of the market place operated with a security center server. It is a figure which shows transition of the display screen of a display. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the amusement hall are provided with enclosed circulation pachinko machines (hereinafter abbreviated as pachinko machines or P machines) 2 as examples of game machines. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes.

  The pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to make one shot of the enclosed ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The pachinko balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 are generally configured by plating hard chrome on the surface of a pachinko ball main body such as a steel ball or a stainless steel ball. However, instead of this chrome plating, a hard material such as diamond-like carbon (DLC) that is excellent in lubricity, wear resistance, and surface smoothness may be coated. The coated diamond-like carbon thin film preferably has a Vickers hardness of about 7000 Hv and a hardness similar to that of diamond.

  Furthermore, as another example of the pachinko ball body, instead of steel balls and stainless steel balls, SUS304 steel material defined in JISG4305 or JISG4304 is used, for example, manufactured into a spherical shape having a diameter of about 11.0 mm. Also good. The mass is preferably 5.4 g or more and 5.7 g or less.

  In addition, the surface of the pachinko ball thus manufactured may be subjected to hard chrome plating instead of the material such as diamond-like carbon (DLC) described above. Since chromium is a non-magnetic metal material, there is no possibility that illegal induction to a winning opening by a magnet will be performed even if the surface of a pachinko ball is plated.

  In addition, SUS304 has the chemical component of the mass percentage shown below as prescribed | regulated by GISG4305 or GISG4304.

  C: 0.08% or less, Si: 1.00% or less, Mn: 2.00% or less, P: 0.045% or less, S: 0.030% or less, Ni: 8.00 to 10.50% , Cr: 18.00 to 20.00%. The rest other than these components is iron and inevitable impurities.

  The pachinko balls may be austenitic stainless steel (for example, SUS305) other than SUS304. This austenitic stainless steel is steel specified by JISG0203. Furthermore, the pachinko ball may be a metal other than austenitic stainless steel, such as aluminum.

  When a pachinko ball is manufactured using such a non-magnetic metal material, the pachinko ball can be prevented from illegal acts that illegally guide the pachinko ball launched into the game area 27 to various winning holes using a magnet. Since it is a nonmagnetic material but a metal material, the pachinko ball can be detected by a conventional proximity switch.

  In addition, as a means to prevent fraudulent acts that illegally guide pachinko balls to various winning holes using a magnet, for example, a magnet detection sensor is provided in a gaming machine, and abnormality detection is performed by detecting abnormality when detecting the magnetic force by the magnet. However, in this case, a magnet detection sensor must be provided in the gaming machine, which causes a disadvantage of increasing the cost of the gaming machine. However, in the case of using pachinko balls made of a nonmagnetic metal material, the above-described disadvantage of cost increase does not occur.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type of pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

  The pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 62 or 70 to the player.

  Further, a counting button 28 is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25 in the pachinko machine 2 for counting the game balls to the holding balls. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28 is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game balls to the holding balls, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game balls currently held are considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed.

  Thus, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P table side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU side.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the card unit according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This card unit 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 3 that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the card balance, the number of possessed balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. Have In the pachinko machine 2, a ball game equivalent to the number of balls specified by the data of game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display 312 and the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (also simply referred to as the card ID) and the membership card when the membership card is received. An infrared signal is received by the IR photosensitive unit 320 from a replay button 319 for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the ID and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall, and an electronic signal An IR light receiving unit is provided for converting to and outputting.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by the pachinko machine 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As described above, this data is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in association with the member card number in an upper server such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. ing. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the holding ball may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. When the host server stores the data in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the host server may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or a higher-level server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time whenever the counting button 28 is operated and the counting process is performed. Or when storing the card in a batch.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321 and a return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the card unit 3. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the balance recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the pachinko machine 2. The return button 322 is operated when the player finishes the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + counting operation) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. The pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a gaming board 26 and other gaming machine frames as described above. In particular, the gaming board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the gaming machine frame is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board when replacing a new stand.

  All winning balls that are won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball apparatus, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and guided to the collection ball passing path 901. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flow path 702. The out ball flow path 702 is provided with an out ball detection switch 701, and a ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls flow down the foul ball return path 151 and flow down from the foul ball return port 150 through the foul ball return path 902 and the recovery ball passage path 901. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151, a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down is provided.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 enters the recovery ball passage path 901, flows down together with the winning ball and the foul ball, and enters the ball collection path 189. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the foul ball merge are detected.

  Further, a 50 replenishment detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at an intermediate position on the downstream side of the shot ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether or not the number of pachinko balls built in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 collects and detects all the pachinko balls that have been shot into the game area 27, and the number of shot balls that have been shot into the game area 27 and the number of shot balls that have been shot. When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The fired ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used for detecting that the number of encapsulated balls built in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the last 50th pachinko balls of the enclosed balls that are stopped in a non-operating state in which no game is being performed are displayed. The position is configured to be located between the 50 replenishment detection switch 904 and the firing ball detection switch 903.

  As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are encapsulated in the gaming machine 2, the pachinko balls that are parked in a state where no game is played will exceed the detection position of the firing ball detection switch 903. The fired ball detection switch 903 is always in a ball detection state, thereby making it possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of encapsulated balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls that are parked in the non-game state are located downstream of the detection position of the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, and the replenishment 50 The individual detection switch 904 enters a non-detection state where no ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too smaller than the predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko balls that have flowed down the ball collection path 189 enter a transport device 190 for transporting the pachinko balls upward. The conveyance device 190 includes a conveyance screw 190b that is rotated by the conveyance motor 40, and the pachinko ball is conveyed upward by the rotation of the conveyance screw 190b. The conveying device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 that polish the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of conveyance, and the surface of the pachinko balls is polished while being conveyed upward. The The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish the pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball entrance of the transport device 190, and a pachinko ball entering the transport device 190 is detected. On the other hand, a pachinko ball conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by a ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying pachinko balls one by one to the ball launch position. When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven and the hitting hammer 920 is intermittently swung. One pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is ejected by the hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 916a and a ball feed member 916b that swings up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 916a in order to supply pachinko balls one by one to the ball firing positions by the hitting hammer 920. Yes. The ball feed member 916b has a U-shape as shown in FIG. 2, and receives one pachinko ball that has flowed down, and in this state, the rectifier solenoid 916a is excited to drive the ball by its driving force. The member 916b swings downward. Then, the received pachinko ball is supplied to the ball hitting position. When the hitting hammer 920 bounces the supplied pachinko ball, the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The hitting hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the hitting direction of the hitting ball, and the hitting hammer 920 is moved in the direction opposite to the hitting direction (back swing direction) by the action of a cam that is rotated by the driving force of the firing motor 18. It is swung. Then, when the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the cam action is released and the hitting hammer 920 is rocked in the driving direction by the biasing force of the spring, so that the pachinko ball is bullet-launched. The spring urging in the hitting direction can be adjusted by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting momentum can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The ball removal portion 915 is provided with a ball removal motor 915a. When a game attendant operates a ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay board 921, the ball removal motor 915a rotates by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be extracted out of the path.

  The ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is used for the on / off control of the conveyance motor 40 by the detection signal. In the state where the hitting operation by the hitting operation handle 25 is not performed and the hitting ball is not shot, the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation, and therefore, the pachinko balls conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 flow down at the position of the rectifier 916. Is stopped and stopped. When the pachinko ball to be stopped reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball detection signal is constantly output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. When the continuous output state of such a ball detection signal continues for a predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds), the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped and the transport of the ball upward is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to fire the hitting ball, the rectifier 916 executes a ball feeding operation. As a result, the ball that has stopped and stopped at the rectifier 916 is stopped. The ball detection signal is not output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and a ball is conveyed. Since the number of balls raised per unit time by driving the conveyance motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls firing per unit time by driving the firing motor 18, the driving of the conveyance motor 40 is started. When a little time has passed, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again outputs a ball detection signal, and the driving of the carry motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hitting of the hit ball continues, the ball detection signal is not output again from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and a ball is conveyed. In the operating state in which the player is performing the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The detection of game ball launching, which detects that the number of game balls has been fired into the game area 27, is detected by the change of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 5) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on this detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor (not shown). This firing motor origin sensor is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 stops when the player releases his / her hand from a touch link (not shown) provided on the hitting operation handle 25, and when the firing motor origin sensor detects the origin of the firing motor 18 at the time of the stop. To control the firing motor 18 to stop.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, if the launch motor 18 is deviated from the origin position and the output of the launch motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the launch motor 18 is rotated forward depending on the current position of the launch motor 18. Alternatively, control is performed to reverse the position and move the stop position of the firing motor 18 to the origin without firing the pachinko ball. The current stop position of the firing motor 18 is compared with the position of the origin to determine whether the firing motor 18 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction in the direction of rotation close to the origin position. You may make it move a stop position to an origin by carrying out rotation control to.

  Similarly, a ball removal motor origin sensor (not shown) is provided in the ball removal motor 915a, and the ball removal motor 915a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The above-described winning ball detection switch, 50 replenishment detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, and out ball detection switch 701 are electrostatic capacitances due to the passage of balls. It consists of proximity switches that detect changes in On the other hand, only the shot ball detection switch 903 is configured by a photosensor of a light projecting / receiving type. In amusement halls, there are cases where fraudulent acts using radio waves are performed in which fraudulent radio waves are transmitted to misdetect the ball detection switch. When such an improper radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may be erroneously detected, but the photosensor has no risk of erroneous detection.

  As a result, when a fraudulent act of transmitting an improper radio wave occurs, the winning ball detection switch, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by proximity switches, output detection signals associated with erroneous detection. However, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the fired ball detection switch 903 formed of a photosensor, the total number of detected balls and the fired ball of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the winning ball detection switch. A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection switch 903. As a result, fraudulent acts caused by radio waves can be monitored. It should be noted that the winning ball detection switch, the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the shot ball detection switch 903 are provided. , All may be composed of the same type of switch.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2. With reference to FIG. 5, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM ( Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a higher-level server 801 (see FIG. 63) for security management, and the pachinko machine 2 A security board 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 while ensuring security is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325 on the CU side and the payout control board 17 on the P platform side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the pachinko machine 2.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. At the same time, the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323 to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350 and converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is output to the display 312 and the display 312 displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  In the pachinko machine 2, the main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, the payout control board 17 that manages and stores the game balls, and the drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 And a variable display device 278 are provided. In FIG. 5, a display control board (also referred to as an effect control board) that controls display of the variable display device based on a command from the main control board 16 is not shown.

  The main control board 16 is provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a CPU work area. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26. The game board 26 is further provided with a display control board (effect control board) for controlling the variable display device 278 and the like.

  The payout control board 17 is provided in the game frame (front frame) 6. The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, the above-described firing ball detection switch 903, out ball detection switch 701, foul ball detection switch 33, counting button 28, and radio wave sensor 173 are provided in a state in which the discharge control board 17 is electrically connected. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173. Details will be described with reference to FIG. Note that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41a but also the fired ball detection switch 903 (see FIG. 2) may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by unauthorized radio waves, ball firing is not detected, while the actually fired ball is recovered and detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. In this case, the number of fired balls and recovered balls (out balls) is flawed, an abnormality is detected, and fraud detection information 3 of “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. (It will be described later in FIG. 11). However, the fraud detection information 3 of the “number of fired / OUT inconsistent balls” is not transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 by sending an illegal radio wave to the fired ball detection switch 903 to make it undetectable. Occurs. In the present embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173 also detects unauthorized radio waves transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch 903, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the pachinko machine 2, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the winning opening). It is transmitted to the dispensing control board 17 when the machine 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the card unit 3 and the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected. From the security board 325 to the payout control board 17, as will be described later, a recovery request, a communication start request, and a communication end Various commands such as a request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the pachinko machine 2 to notify the recovery information, as will be described later. The payout control board 17 receives the recovery request and notifies the card unit 3 of the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2. The communication start request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to start communication. The payout control board 17 responds to the card unit 3 with the communication start in response to the communication start request. The communication end request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to end communication. The payout control board 17 receives a communication end request and responds to the card unit 3 with a communication end.

  The status information request is a command that requests the pachinko machine 2 to notify the status information. The payout control board 17 receives the status information request and notifies the card unit 3 of the status information of the pachinko machine 2. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17 receives a card insertion notification and responds to the card unit 3 that a card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17 receives a card return notification and responds to the card unit 3 that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 of test data. The payout control board 17 responds with test data to the card unit 3 in response to the communication test request.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325.

  The game frame (front frame) 6 is provided with a launch control board 31 and a launch motor 18. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided in the game frame (front frame) 6. The display unit 54 receives display data from the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3 and displays a display screen. As described above, in this embodiment, the P-side display 54 is controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54 is controlled to be displayed on the P-side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the card unit 3 side and the pachinko machine 2 side, and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 6, main ones of various data stored on the card unit 3 side (CU side) and the pachinko machine 2 side (P base side) and transmission / reception modes thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, holding balls, storage balls, and card balances are managed and stored on the CU3 side.

  FIG. 6 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU 3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P base 2 side. First, when the power supply is turned on for the first time when the P stand 2 (pachinko machine 2) and the CU 3 (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P stand 2 side. 17 has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3 and the P unit 2. The last serial number is a number updated at the end of the updated communication number.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3 backs up and stores the serial number transmitted to the P base 2 by a command, and when it receives the serial number from the P base 2 next, it rewrites the serial number stored in the backup and stores it. Then, when the next command is transmitted, the serial number stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P unit 2, and the transmitted serial number is stored in the backup. In CU3, such processing is repeated.

  Similarly, the serial number received from the CU3 by the command is backed up and stored in the P unit 2, and when the response is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3 next time, the serial number stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. Store the sent serial number as a backup. When the next response is received, the serial number stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received serial number. Such processing is repeated in the P stand 2.

  For example, a command is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted serial number n is stored on the P base 2 side. Then, when a response is returned from the P platform 2 side to the CU 3 side, the stored serial number n is added together (n + 1) and transmitted. On the CU3 side, since the returned serial number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored serial number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the next time the command is sent, the serial number is incremented by 1 and n + 2. A serial number is sent to the P stand 2 side.

  The current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side. The current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 5) on the P platform 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the current ball related information, and is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side as a count value of the game ball counter as will be described later.

Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response.
The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as the number of subtracted balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being fired in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P stand 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, and counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored as backup data in the previous ball related information storage area (rewrite) ), The values of the added ball counter, the subtracted ball counter, and the counted ball counter as current ball related information are cleared to zero. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), data on the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the current ball related information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before. Is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 manages the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the current ball related information transmitted from the P stand 2 one by one. Is possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the upper server 801 (in this case, for halls). Error notification may be performed by the management computer or the upper server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P side. . Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and stored on the P unit 2 side by the upper server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of additional balls (the number of additional balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image in which, in a conventional encapsulated pachinko machine in which each counter is provided, it is prohibited to grab a ball before counting remaining on a plate by hand and use it for a wagon service.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions. The number of cards held represents the number of balls currently held by CU3, and is the total obtained by subtracting the number of balls paid out from the number of balls held at the time of card insertion and adding the number of balls counted.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between the card unit (CU) 3 and the pachinko machine (P unit) 2 will be described.

  FIG. 7 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline. First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2.

  A response named “recovery response” is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information. A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication.

  A response of a communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start. A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication.

  A response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3. A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The information information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU side to the P platform side shown in FIG.

  A response of a status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the information response includes the current ball related information and the number of game balls shown in FIG. A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion.

  A response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of this card insertion response is a response to the card insertion to the CU3.

  A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return.

  A response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. A response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  Next, based on FIGS. 8 to 29, the command / response status information request, status information response, card insertion notification, card insertion response, card return notification, card return response, recovery request, recovery response shown in FIG. The contents of the transmission start request, communication start response, communication start response, communication end request, communication end response, communication test request, and communication test response will be described in detail.

  First, referring to FIG. 8, a status information request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted status information request command notifies the P unit 2 of the status of the CU 3. Note that the CU 3 periodically collects information and status of the P platform 2 using this command.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of serial number, command, CU status, number of added balls, and CU error status, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for requesting status information, and is “0x06” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The CU state is the state of CU3 to be notified to the P stand 2. When Bit0 is “1”, card insertion processing is in progress. When Bit1 is “1”, it is a game permission request, and Bit2 is “1”. When "3" is a game prohibition request, when Bit3 is "1", it is a game ball addition request, and when Bit4 is "1", counting ball reception is complete, and Bits 5 to 7 are unused.

  In addition, data of the number of additional balls that is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1” is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This data on the number of balls to be added indicates a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  The CU error state is an error code that is occurring in CU3. When “0x00”, there is no error, and when “0x01”-“0xFF”, an error is occurring.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining each Bit in the CU state in more detail. Bit 0 shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the data name is being inserted into the card, “1” indicates that the card is being inserted, and “0” indicates that the card has not been inserted. That is, Bit0 indicates a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance by the CU.

  Bit 1 indicates a game permission request with a data name of “1”, and indicates a game permission request when “1” and no game permission request when “0”, respectively. That is, Bit1 requests a game permission to the P base 2 according to the state of the CU3. The timing for permitting the game is, for example, when the user leaves the seat.

  Bit 2 indicates a game prohibition request when the data name is “1”, and indicates a game prohibition request when “1” and no game prohibition request when “0”, respectively. In other words, Bit 2 makes a game prohibition request to P stand 2 depending on the state of CU 3. The timing of game prohibition includes, for example, when the user is away from the seat, or when an operation failure error occurs.

  Bit 3 indicates a game ball addition request when the data name is “1”, and indicates that there is no game ball addition request when “1” and “0”, respectively. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  Bit 4 indicates that the counting ball reception is completed, “1” counting ball reception completion, and “0” indicates no counting ball reception. That is, Bit 4 notifies that the number of balls counted at the time of counting the game balls has been received from the P unit 2. Bit 4 is used for confirmation of delivery of “count ball” in a response of a status information response described later.

  Next, referring to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of the status information response to be transmitted notifies the CU 3 of the information / status of the P unit 2.

  As specific data of the status information request, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 10, there are serial number, command, ball count information, game machine status, fraud detection information, and game information data. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for requesting status information, and is “0x16” in binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The number of balls information is the number of balls of P table 2 (the number of game balls, the number of back balls, the number of fired balls, the outro passage at the time (current) when a command for requesting the status information is transmitted from CU 3 to P table 2 The number of balls, and the number of balls counted) and the firing strength. The number of game balls is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The number of back balls is the number of back balls when fired (when there are a plurality of back balls at the time of transmission, they are added together). The number of fired balls is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). The number of balls that have passed through the outlet is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 145 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed during transmission, they are added together). The number of balls to be counted is the number of game balls counted. The firing strength is strength for launching a game ball.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the meanings of various balls and the confirmation points in more detail. As for the number of game balls shown in FIG. 12, the number of game balls held by CU 3 is calculated by using “number of prize balls × winning number”, “number of back balls” and “number of fired balls” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  The number of back balls (addition) is the number of foul balls, and is data to be added to the number of game balls held by the CU3. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not add the number of game balls.

  The number of shot balls (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by CU3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  The number of counting balls (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards possessed. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the gaming machine state indicates the state of the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and the gaming machine state 1, the gaming machine state 2, And information on the game table error status.

  Bit 0 in gaming machine state 1 is permitting a game when it is “0”, and is prohibited when it is “1”. Bit 1 in the gaming machine state 1 is waiting when it is “0”, and is playing when it is “1”. Bit 2 in the gaming machine state 1 is “1”, indicating that there is no gaming ball. When Bit 3 in the gaming machine state 1 is “1”, the game is completed. Bit 4 in gaming machine state 1 is counting when it is “1”. Bit 5 in gaming machine state 1 is the result of adding game balls when “1”, and Bits 6 to 7 in gaming machine state 1 are spares.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in more detail. Bit0 shown in FIG. 13 indicates whether the name is game permission / game prohibition, and whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. It is in. Bit1 indicates whether the name is waiting / playing, and whether the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball) or not. Not in the state), when “1”, the game is in progress (the fan is firing a ball).

  Bit 2 has the name “no game ball” and indicates the presence or absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the name is game completion and the ball firing is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). Note that the P stand 2 times out and completes the game when the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the ball launch is stopped.

  Bit 4 indicates whether the name is being counted and whether or not the game ball is being counted (counting button is being pressed), and when it is “0”, it is counting when it is “1”. Bit 5 is a game ball addition result whose name is a game ball addition process result, and is “0” for addition and “NG” for addition NG.

  Returning to FIG. 11, Bit 0 in gaming machine state 2 is a big hit when it is “1”. Bit 1 in the gaming machine state 2 is in the special symbol probability variation function operating state when “1”. Bit 2 in the gaming machine state 2 is the special symbol variation time reduction function operating state when “1”. Bits 3 to 7 in the game table state 2 are reserved.

  The gaming machine error state is an error code that is occurring on the P machine 2, where there is no error when “0x00” and an error is occurring when “0x01” − “0xFF”.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 2 in more detail. Bit0 shown in FIG. 14 has a name that is a big hit, shows one piece of information of the big hit information, and sets “1” during the big hit. Bit 1 indicates that the name is being probabilistically changed and indicates one information of jackpot information, and “1” is set during probabilistic change. Bit 2 has a name that is short and short, indicates one information of jackpot information, and sets “1” in the short and long time.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the fraud detection information is information detected by the P unit 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The fraud detection state 1 and the fraud detection state 2. Information of fraud detection information 1 to fraud detection information 5 is included.

  Bit 0 of fraud detection state 1 is a state of detection of a prize ball sensor goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is a fraudulent act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko or slot machine. Bit 1 of fraud detection state 1 is a state of detecting a return ball sensor goto when “1”. Bit 2 of the fraud detection state 1 is a state of detection of the complex sensor goto when “1”. Bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 is a state of fraud detection when “1”. Bit 4 in fraud detection state 1 is a fraud detection state when “1”. Bits 5 to 7 in the fraud detection state 1 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of fraud detection state 2 is a door open state when “1”. Bit 1 in the fraud detection state 2 is a state in which the game board radio wave sensor is detected when “1”. Bit 2 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of detection of disconnection of the game board radio wave sensor when “1”. Bit 3 in the fraud detection state 2 is a state of fraud detection when it is “1”. Bit 4 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of magnetic sensor detection when “1”. Bit 5 in the fraud detection state 2 is a state of detection of the gaming frame radio wave sensor when “1”. Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 2 is a state of detection of disconnection of the game frame radio wave sensor when “1”. Bit 7 in fraud detection state 1 is reserved.

  The fraud detection information 1 is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls) (see S664 in FIG. 66). The fraud detection information 2 is data indicating information on return ball sensor goto detection (return prize inconsistent number of balls). The return ball is a foul ball. The fraud detection information 3 is data indicating information on the composite sensor goto detection (number of fired / OUT mismatched balls). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The fraud detection information 4 is data indicating information on fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The fraud detection information 5 is data indicating information on fraudulent out detection (number of fraudulent outlet passing balls).

  The game information is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and includes the number of game information, type information 1 to n, and prize ball information 1 to n. It is out.

  The number of game information is the number (n) of type information / prize ball information, and is 0 to 255 (variable length). The type information 1 to n indicates the game type information 1 to n, and the prize ball information 1 to n indicates the game prize ball information 1 to n.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the type information in the game information in more detail. In the type information shown in FIG. 15, the names from Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data types, indicating the data type of the game information. No information when “0”, no winning opening when “1” , “2” is the big prize opening, “3” is the start winning opening, and “4” is the number of symbol stops. The names from Bit 4 to Bit 7 are data numbers, which indicate data numbers for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, the data number.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating the prize ball information in the game information in more detail. In the prize ball information shown in FIG. 16, the name from Bit 0 to Bit 3 is the number of prize balls, and indicates the number of prize balls at the time of winning for each data type of game information. When “1” to “15”, the number of prize balls is data. The names from Bit 4 to Bit 7 are the number of winnings, and indicate the number of winnings (cumulative) for each data type of game information. No information when “0”, data of winning numbers when “1” to “15” It is.

  By multiplying the number of winning balls by the number of winning balls, “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls”, the number of balls to be added to the number of gaming balls by winning can be found. When the added number of balls is received without holding the card, CU3 does not add the number of game balls.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17, a card insertion notification command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted.

  Specific data of this card insertion notification includes data of serial number, command, card ID, and card insertion time, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for card insertion notification, and is “0x07” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The card ID is ID information of the inserted card. The card insertion time is the time when a card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1). The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, the day information is two digits DD, and the time information is two. This is data represented by a digit hh, minute information by two digits mm, and second information by two digits ss.

  Next, referring to FIG. 18, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The transmitted card insertion response response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received.

  Specific data of the card insertion response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a card insertion response, and is “0x17” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, a card return notification command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted card return notification command is to notify the P unit 2 of the card return. Further, the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed.

  Specific data of the card return notification includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a card return notification, and is “0x08” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 20, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The transmitted card return response is a response to the card return notification sent to the CU 3.

  Specific data of this card return response includes data of serial number, command, card ID, and card insertion time, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a card return response, and is “0x18” in binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The card ID is ID information of the card being inserted. The card insertion time is the time when a card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1). The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, the day information is two digits DD, and the time information is two. This is data represented by a digit hh, minute information by two digits mm, and second information by two digits ss. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Next, referring to FIG. 21, a recovery request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted recovery request command is for notifying the P unit 2 of the recovery information.

  Specific data of this recovery request includes data of a serial number, a command, a last transmission serial number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, and the number of added balls, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a recovery request, and is “0x03” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The previous last transmission serial number is data of the serial number of the command last transmitted to the P-unit 2 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no data. The previously inserted card ID is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no inserted card.

  The previous card insertion time is data of the insertion time of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The number of additional balls is data on the number of additional balls of game balls, and when it is “0”, there is no data on the number of additional balls.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the recovery process of the P base 2 in detail. The recovery process for the P-unit 2 shown in FIG. 22 is added to the game balls with reference to the number of balls to be added if the P-station 2 has not performed the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified by the CU 3. To do. Specifically, when the added ball number data is “0” and there is no added ball, the CU 3 does not transmit the added ball number data to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 does not perform the recovery process. On the other hand, when the added ball number data is “1” to “65535” and there is an added ball, CU3 transmits the added ball number data by ball lending, holding ball payout, and accumulated ball payout to P stand 2, and P stand 2 performs a recovery process of adding the added number of balls to the current game ball.

  Next, referring to FIG. 23, a response of the recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of the recovery response that is transmitted notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information held by the P unit 2. This “recovery information” is stored as a backup so that when the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 as the recovery process is executed, the P unit 2 transmits a recovery response to the CU 3. It is data. As recovery information returned from the P unit 2 to the CU 3, as shown in FIG. The latest game table information and the latest game information are included.

  The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of the recovery response, and is “0x13” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The last last transmission serial number is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no stored serial number. The previously inserted card ID is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no inserted card.

  The previous card insertion time is data of the insertion time of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The number of additional balls is data on the number of additional balls of game balls, and when it is “0”, there is no data on the number of additional balls.

  The previous game table information is the game table information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on the number of game balls, the number of back balls, the number of fired balls, the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the number of balls counted. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “number of back balls” is the number of back balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “out mouth passing ball number” is the number of out mouth passing balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Counting balls” is the number of counting balls notified to the CU3 last time.

  The previous game information is game information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on the number of game information, type information 1 to type information n, and prize ball information 1 to prize ball information n. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. “Type information 1” is the game type information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Type information n” is the game type information n notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information n” is game award ball information n notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The latest game table information is the latest game table information, and includes information on the number of game balls, the number of back balls, the number of shot balls, the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the number of balls counted. The latest game machine information is set to “0” when all information is not available. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls currently held by the P stand 2. The “number of back balls” is the number of back balls (the number of foul balls) currently held by the P stand 2. The “number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls currently held by the P stand 2. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls held by the current P stand 2. The “number of counting balls” is the number of counting balls currently held by the P stand 2.

  The latest game information is the game information currently held by the P platform 2 and includes information on the number of game information, type information 1 to type information n, and prize ball information 1 to prize ball information n. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information currently held in the P table 2. The “type information 1” is the game type information 1 held in the current P table 2. “Type information n” is the game type information n held by the current P unit 2. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 held in the current P stand 2. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n held in the current P stand 2.

  As shown in Note 1) in FIG. 23, the recovery information is set to ALL0 at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite. As shown in Note 2), if the CU3 has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P table 2, the CU3 performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information and the latest game machine information. Do. When the “last previous transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the latest gaming machine information.

  Further, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, exchange of CU or P units), it is conceivable to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device.

  Next, referring to FIG. 24, a communication start request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication start request command notifies the P base 2 of the start of communication. Further, the P base 2 clears the recovery information.

  Specific data of the communication start request includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication start request, and is “0x04” in binary data expressed in hexadecimal.

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, a response of a communication start response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication start response notifies the CU 3 that communication has started normally.

  Specific data of this communication start response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication start response, and is “0x14” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 26, a communication end request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 of the communication end.

  Specific data of this communication end request includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a command sequence number and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication end request, and is “0x05” in binary data expressed in hexadecimal.

  Next, referring to FIG. 27, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication end response notifies the CU 3 that the communication has been normally completed. Further, after the notification, the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop communication and wait for restart.

  Specific data of this communication end response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication end response, and is “0x15” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 28, a communication test request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of the test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted.

  Specific data of this communication test request includes serial number, command, and test data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication test request, and is “0x0F” in binary data expressed in hexadecimal. The test data is data for testing notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  Next, referring to FIG. 29, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication test response is to notify the test data to the CU3. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted.

  Specific data of this communication test response includes serial number, command, and test data data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication test response, and is “0x1F” in binary data in hexadecimal representation. The test data is arbitrary data that is test data notified to the CU 3.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
Next, a process executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323 and a process executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 30, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. After receiving the response, CU3 transmits the next command to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns the response to CU3 in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 30, the period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

  The command and response are transmitted by a polling method using CU3 as a primary station. However, recovery request / response, communication start request / response, communication end request / response command, and response are not included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, processing when a communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. If the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. If no response is received from the P-unit 2 within 200 ms after the second retransmission, the CU 3 determines that communication is abnormal at this stage and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused by the disconnection of the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 22 or the disconnection of the connection wiring or the power supply of the P base 2.

CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for one second, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is interrupted, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. . The cause of this communication disconnection can be the disconnection of the connector of the CU3 and the connector of the P base 2, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3, as described in FIG.

  Note that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side do not include the recovery request / response, communication start request / response, communication end request / response command, and response.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the processing of the connection sequence when the power is turned on will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 33 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  The display data acquisition sequence is executed on condition that the authentication sequence is executed and an authentication result indicating that the authentication sequence is appropriate is obtained. This display data acquisition sequence is for the CU to download and store display data stored in a database 803 (see FIG. 76) of a server (also referred to as a security center server) 802 installed in the security center 804. It is processing. The database 803 stores display data for each gaming machine in association with each gaming machine chip information. Therefore, the CU receives the gaming machine chip information stored in the P machines, and the CU transmits the received gaming machine chip information to the security center server 802 via the upper server 801. The security center server 802 searches for the corresponding display data, transmits it to the CU via the upper server 801, and the CU receives and stores it. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, since the display data is acquired when the power is turned on, that is, during a time zone other than the business hours when the game is actually performed in the game hall, the control burden on the CU 3 is reduced. In other words, CU3 performs various controls such as card reception processing, card writing / discharging processing, bill recognition machine (Bill Bali) and communication control with P stand 2 during business hours, and avoids such business hours. Since the display data is acquired in the time zone, the control burden on the CU 3 can be reduced.

  When downloading display data created by a gaming machine maker, it is downloaded through the route of the security center server 802 → the upper server 801 → CU3, but when browsing the marketplace described later and downloading the display data from there. The security center server 802 → the hall management computer → CU3 is downloaded.

  The security center 804 registers the gaming machine chip information and checks the consistency of the gaming machine, registers the gaming machine shipping information and manages the consistency check, and sends the gaming machine shipping information whose consistency is confirmed to the key management center. Is an institution that distributes

  The server that distributes the display data to the CU 3 is not limited to the security center server 802, and may be, for example, a server installed in each game arcade or a possession management server (upper server 801). In addition to these, a dedicated server may be provided, or a server provided for each gaming machine manufacturer may be used.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission serial number, the last inserted card ID, the previous card insertion time, and the number of added balls. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 21, and “recovery data” transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. .

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery response).

  This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, the previous card insertion time, the previous gaming machine information, the previous gaming information, the latest gaming machine information, and the latest gaming information. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 23, and “recovery data” transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. .

  The CU 3 that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 backs up the serial number when the command is transmitted. Each time the P unit 2 transmits a response corresponding to the received command, it increments the serial number. However, it is not counted up when the response is retransmitted. When receiving a response with the same serial number as the previously received serial number, the CU 3 determines that a communication failure has occurred and the P base 2 has retransmitted the response. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “n”. The P base 2 counts up the serial number and returns a response of the recovery response to the CU 3 as “n + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “n + 2”, and transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 counts up the serial number to “n + 3” and returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command of serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 backs up the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of counted balls, the number of symbol stops, the number of winning prizes, and the data of the game table state. Further, the P stand 2 clears the values of the counters of the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of counted balls, the number of symbols stopped, and the number of winning prizes. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response of serial number = n + 5 to the CU3.

  Upon receiving the response, the CU 3 backs up the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of balls counted, the number of symbol stops, the number of winning prizes, and the game table state data based on the status information response. Note that the breakdown of the number of added balls is “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The breakdown of the number of subtraction balls is “number of fired balls”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command of serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response of serial number = n + 7 to the CU 3. Each time the P unit 2 transmits a response of the status information response, it backs up the data and clears the counter. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data every time it receives a response of the status information response.

  With reference to FIG. 34, the process of CU3 and P stand 2 when a card is inserted is demonstrated. First, before inserting a card, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the card is inserted, the CU 3 outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the taken card and receives the read information. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is verified by checking whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether the card is a member card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the upper-level server 801 (see FIG. 63), for example, the holding ball, the stored ball, and the card balance. This means that it is in the process of executing the process of displaying on the display 312 and displaying on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, the status information request including the serial number = n + 2 and the card insertion state = OFF is issued. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 3 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 4, a card ID, and a card insertion time to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID and card insertion time data, and returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 6 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2 to notify the P unit 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 7 and the game permission to the CU 3.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 8 and card insertion status = ON to P-unit 2, and P-unit 2 sends a response of status information response including serial number = n + 9 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, processing when depositing into the inserted card will be described. The inserted card is a general 0 yen 0 card (stock card with a balance of 0 yen and 0 coins) stocked in advance in the CU. In the present embodiment, a card is shown as an example of a recording medium stocked in advance in the CU, but IC coins may be used instead of the card.

  First, before the deposit operation, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the game prohibition to the CU3.

  The player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 and performs a deposit operation. When a deposit operation is performed, the CU 3 writes the amount of money deposited by the card reader / writer on a card stocked in advance and the card reader / writer reads information recorded on the card on which the amount is written. Processing is executed.

  When the deposit operation is performed, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 2, a card ID, and a card insertion time to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID and card insertion time data, and returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 3 to the CU 3.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P base 2 to notify the P base 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5 and the game permission to the CU 3. As a result, the game is permitted. Thereafter, the game is made possible by securing a game ball using the balance of the card.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and card insertion state = ON to P-unit 2, and P-unit 2 returns a response of status information response including serial number = n + 7 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. That is, a process when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is consumed will be described. In the processing of FIG. 36, the current number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, CU3 lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen, and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175. Back up your data. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone when the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54 is displayed that 125 balls are withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of addition balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, serial number = n + 3, number of additional balls = 175, game balls. A response of the status information response including the addition result = OK is returned to CU3.

  Thereafter, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and game ball addition request = OFF to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a status information response including serial number = n + 5 and the number of additional balls = 175. A response is returned to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the process of replaying after paying out the balls and paying out the balls will be described. In FIG. 37, the initial number of game balls is “50”. The replay process in FIG. 37 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the replay button 319 in a state where there is a ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of 125 balls from the ball or the storage ball, updates the number of game balls, Data of number = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up. In this way, the consumption of the holding balls or the stored balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of pressing the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding balls, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by selecting and operating. It may be. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 displays the addition of the game balls, and transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, serial number = n + 3, number of additional balls = 175, game balls. A response of the status information response including the addition result = OK is returned to CU3.

  Note that CU3 indicates that the game ball is being added by displaying on the display 54 that 125 balls are being dropped from the holding ball or the stored ball and being added to the game ball.

  Thereafter, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and game ball addition request = OFF to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a status information response including serial number = n + 5 and the number of additional balls = 175. A response is returned to CU3.

  Next, a process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 38, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 800, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the count button 28 once to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. This single press is a short press of less than 1 second, and is different from a long press of 1 second or longer described with reference to FIG. When the counting button 28 is pressed, the payout control unit 171 of the P platform 2 measures the pressing time, and determines whether the pressing is short for less than 1 second or long pressing for 1 second or more. “Press the“ count ”button once” in FIG. 38 indicates a case where the payout control unit 171 determines that the short press is less than 1 second. In this case, 100 balls are counted and counted. Counted as a ball. When the initial number of game balls is “800”, the number of game balls is “700” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  In the operation of pressing the count button 28 once, the number of balls to be counted as the counting ball may be changed by the time during which the count button 28 is pressed shortly. For example, when the count button 28 is pressed for a short time of less than 0.5 seconds, the number of balls counted as the counting ball is 100 balls. When the count button 28 is pressed for a short time of 0.5 seconds or longer, the number of balls counted as counting balls is 400 balls. Further, when the time during which the count button 28 is pressed is a short press for 0.5 seconds or more, all of the remaining number of game balls may be counted as a count ball.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the state of the number of game balls = 700 and the number of counting balls = 100, so that the serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 700, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 800 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 700 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased. In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the data on the number of game balls is converted to the data on the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of game balls and the data for the number of balls are displayed in a bar graph, and the bar graph for the number of game balls is increased while decreasing the bar graph for the number of game balls, or a part of the bar graph for the number of game balls is It is possible to repeat the display of moving to the bar graph or display various effects.

  Further, the player performs an operation of pressing the counting button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. When the current number of game balls is “700” balls, the number of game balls is “600” balls and the count ball is “100” balls by pressing the count button 28 once.

  Immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once is performed, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 of the number of game balls = 600 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 600, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 700 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 600 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls. If a status information response indicating 100 counts has been received before the count display for the previous 100 balls is completed, the current count display for the previous 100 game balls is displayed continuously. 100 counts are displayed based on the status information response.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 600, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Here, a case has been described in which 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls by pressing the counting button 28 once, but it is counted by pressing the counting button 28 once. The counting balls are not limited to 100 balls. For example, a configuration in which 200 balls or 300 balls out of the number of game balls is counted and counted as a counting ball by pressing the counting button 28 once short may be used.

  Next, a process of counting and subtracting all the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 39, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the counting button 28 (an operation of continuously pressing the button for one second or more). “Pressing the“ count ”button length” in FIG. 39 indicates a case where the payout control unit 171 determines that the button has been pressed for 1 second or longer, and in this case, in one command / response period (200 ms). Of the number of game balls, 100 balls are counted and counted as counting balls. When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  Immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P platform 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is long-pressing the count button 28 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including ON during counting = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 0 and the number of counting balls = 0, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 7, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response of the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (0 ball) to the number of balls (200 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 0 (game balls before update) Number) -0 (counted ball count) = 0 data is backed up.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 8 and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. The reason for counting ball reception = OFF is that the number of counting balls received in the previous response to the status information response is 0, and there is no need to notify the P stand 2 of receipt of the counting ball. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 9, the number of game balls = 0, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Here, a case has been described in which 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls during one command / response period (200 ms) by long pressing the count button 28. The counting balls counted during the command / response period (200 ms) are not limited to 100 balls. For example, when the count button 28 is long pressed, the number of counting balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) may be 200 balls, 300 balls, and the like.

  In addition, regardless of the current number of game balls, a configuration in which all of the game balls are counted by performing an operation of long-pressing the counting button 28 for about 5 seconds (25 command / response periods) may be employed. Note that the number of game balls to be counted may be changed depending on the operation time for which the count button 28 is long pressed. That is, when the current number of game balls is large, the number of balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) is increased, and when the current number of game balls is small, the period of one command / response ( The number of counting balls counted in 200 ms) is reduced. Specifically, when the current number of gaming balls is 10,000 balls, the counting balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) are set to 400 balls, and when the current number of gaming balls is 1000 balls, once The number of counting balls counted during the command / response period (200 ms) is 40 balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the return process of a member card, a general balance card, and a general possession card will be described. In FIG. 40, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the count button 28 (an operation of pressing the button for 1 second or longer). By long-pressing the count button 28, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls in one command / response period (200 ms). When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  However, in the counting display performed on the display 54, the number of game balls and the number of counting balls are not instantaneously changed to such numbers, but the game balls are counted and decreased gradually. The effect is such that the ball is gradually increased. For this reason, until the counting display is completed, the number of game balls and the number of points on display on the display 54 do not match the number of game balls and points on the memory on the CU side and the P side.

  However, instead of such control, the counting status (conversion status) of the points on the display may be synchronized with the actual data conversion processing. In this case, since the data counting process (conversion process) can be completed immediately, the counting display (conversion display) synchronized therewith also ends immediately. In this case, it may not be possible to sufficiently notify the player that the data has been counted. Therefore, while displaying the count, the display may be switched to the display “counting is completed” from the middle. In this case, the card return operation may be validated from the stage when the display of “counting has been completed” is started.

  Immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P platform 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is long-pressing the count button 28 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including ON during counting = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. The CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including a serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2 by performing an operation in which the player presses the return button 322. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 7, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Further, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the upper server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 9, the number of game balls = 0, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process for prompting a counting operation when returning a membership card, a general balance card, or a general possession card will be described. In FIG. 41, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. However, since CU3 has 200 balls and is not 0 balls, CU3 prohibits the card return operation and prompts the player to perform a counting operation. "Please perform the counting operation." In this way, the display for prompting the counting operation is performed, so that the player can know the reason why the card return operation cannot be performed. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 200, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the count button 28 (an operation of pressing the button for 1 second or longer). By long-pressing the count button 28, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls in one command / response period (200 ms). When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  Immediately after the operation of depressing the count button 28 for a long time, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the state of the number of game balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, so that the serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is pressing the count button 28 for a long time has a serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including ON during counting = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. The CU 3 transmits a command to notify the card return including the serial number = n + 8 to the P-unit 2 by performing an operation in which the player presses the return button 322. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 9, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Further, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the upper server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 10 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 11, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the card return operation can be finally performed through the display of converting the game ball obtained by the game into the possession ball by the player's operation. For this reason, a game ball is counted without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to a conventional game system that allows a ball counter obtained by counting the balls obtained by the game to be counted by each card counter. A new game system using data can be provided. In addition, if the conversion display of all game balls does not end, the card return operation will not be valid, so it is a system that does not allow you to accidentally leave the game machine and leave with game balls remaining The game can be reminiscent of the player, giving the player a sense of security.

  In addition, since the state in which the game balls are counted is displayed on the display device 54 on the gaming machine side, it is easy for the player sitting facing the gaming machine to see the counting state. Further, as described above, the display control unit 350 that controls the display on the gaming machine side display 54 is provided on the CU side, so that the display control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a process for automatically collecting a general card having a balance of 0 yen and a possession of 0 balls will be described. In FIG. 42, the balance specified by the inserted recording medium (member card, etc.) is “0” yen, the number of balls is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. It has become. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game table information, so that the serial number = n + 1, no game ball = OFF, game completion = OFF, the number of game balls = 20, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls A response of a status information response including = 30 is returned to CU3. In response to the notification from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 20, the total number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 30.

  Thereafter, the P platform 2 detects that the number of game balls has decreased to 0 when the player plays a game (the number of game balls = 0).

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 3, game ball no = ON, game completion = OFF, game ball count = 0, addition ball count = 0, subtraction ball count = 20. Reply to CU3. In response to the notification from the P stand 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 0, the cumulative number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 20.

  After that, the P stand 2 detects that the game is completed after the number of game balls becomes zero and the floating ball (the number of balls in the game) in the game area 27 disappears. When a status information response of “game completion ON” is transmitted from the P stand 2 due to the absence of floating balls (the number of balls in the game), the CU 3 will display, for example, “Do you want to end the game?” Message may be displayed, and the player may touch the “YES” display to collect the general card.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 5, game ball no = ON, game completion = ON, game ball count = 0, addition ball count = 0, subtraction ball count = 0. Reply to CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 7, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . If the card matches, the collected general cards are collected. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Further, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the upper server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a state information response including serial number = n + 9, no game ball = ON, game completion = ON, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the jackpot process during the game will be described. In FIG. 43, the number of balls “500” specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is all converted into game balls, and the initial number of game balls is “500”. Suppose that

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game table information, so that the serial number = n + 1, the big hit = OFF, the number of game balls = 490, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13 The response of the response is returned to CU3. In response to the notification from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 490, the total number of added balls = + 3, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 13.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 3, the big hit = OFF, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 10 to the CU3. Although not shown, the CU 3 receives the notification from the P stand 2 and backs up the data of the number of game balls = 480, the total number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 10.

  Thereafter, a big hit occurs at the P stand 2. After the big hit occurs, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the big hit = ON, the number of game balls = 580, the number of added balls = 120, and the number of subtracted balls = 20 to the CU3. In response to the notification from the P stand 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 580, the total number of added balls = + 120, the total number of subtracted balls = + 20, and the number of jackpots = + 1. In addition, the current cumulative number of added balls = 123 and the current cumulative number of subtracted balls = 43.

  Thereafter, the player performs a manipulation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by pressing the count button 28 once. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the current number of game balls is “580”, the number of game balls is “480” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for a status information request including serial number = n + 6 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 480 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 7, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of game balls = 580 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls counted) = 480.

  Further, CU3 has 100 balls by counting operation, and further, the number of balls acquired in this game (= added ball total “123” balls−subtracted ball total “40” balls, or the current number of game balls) “580” balls + current number of balls “0” balls—number of balls at the start of the game “500” balls) = + 80 balls are positive, so the display 312 displays a dollar box (see FIG. 67). Start. In this way, in the dollar box display, in order to match the conventional act of transferring the balls acquired by the player in this game to the dollar box and stacking the dollar box, the counting operation is performed and the holding ball is set to 0 balls or more. And it is executed when the number of balls acquired in this game becomes positive. Specifically, the dollar box display expresses an image in which 1000 balls are placed in one dollar box shown in FIG. 67, and balls are filled in order from the dollar box below, and the dollar boxes are stacked. In addition, when the player converts from a possession ball to a game ball, the dollar box display is displayed by reducing the number of balls from the dollar box by the number of balls converted to a game ball.

  Note that the dollar box display is not limited to the condition displayed when the number of possessed balls is 0 or more and the number of balls acquired in this game is positive, for example, acquired in this game The condition may be changed, such as displaying when the number of balls over 1000 balls. Also, the dollar box display may be displayed when the number of balls acquired in the current game is positive, regardless of the number of balls held. Furthermore, the means for displaying the number of balls and the number of balls acquired in the current game is not limited to the dollar box display, and the number of balls may be digitally displayed on the display 312. Further, instead of or in addition to the display 312, the display may be displayed on the display 54, or a dedicated display may be provided separately for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the subtraction process from the game ball by the counting operation during the game (particularly during ball launching) will be described. In FIG. 44, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “400” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 400, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3. In addition, since the ball is being fired, the cumulative number of subtracted balls needs to include information for subtracting the game ball by firing the ball, but in FIG. 44, the game ball is subtracted by firing the ball to simplify the explanation. The information is not shown. Of course, when the number of game balls becomes 250 balls or less, which will be described later, due to the ball firing, it goes without saying that the counting operation is not performed even if the counting button 28 is pressed.

  Thereafter, the player performs a manipulation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by pressing the count button 28 once. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the initial number of game balls is “400”, the number of game balls is “300” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 300 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 300, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of game balls = 400 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 300 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Further, the player performs an operation of pressing the counting button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball. When the count button 28 is pressed once for a short time, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as count balls. Therefore, if the current number of game balls is “300” balls, pressing the count button 28 once should result in “200” balls and “100” balls. is there.

  However, the P stand 2 is in a state where the ball is continuously fired (a state where the game is continued), and the number of game balls is successively subtracted. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the counting button 28 is short-pressed or long-pressed and the timing at which the ball is fired, there is a possibility that the number of game balls is counted redundantly between the fired ball and the counting ball. Therefore, in order to avoid the possibility of such a problem, for example, when the number of game balls is 250 or less when the ball is continuously fired, control is performed so that the subsequent counting operation is not performed. To do. The P stand 2 determines a state in which the ball is continuously fired based on, for example, the input state of the touch sensor and the state of the shot ball detection switch 903.

  Therefore, when a ball is being fired during a game, if the current number of game balls is “300”, 100 balls cannot be counted even if the count button 28 is pressed once for a short time. Only, the number of game balls is “250” balls and the counting ball is “50” balls. Similarly, if the current number of game balls is “300”, even if the count button 28 is pressed once for a long time, 100 balls cannot be counted and only 50 balls are counted, and the number of game balls is “250” balls. The counting balls become “50” balls. If the count button 28 is pressed for a long time, it is possible to count all because there is an intention to end the game.

  Immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once is performed, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 of the number of game balls = 250 and the number of counting balls = 50, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 50, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Here, “the number of gaming balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 50”, as described above, the counting operation is performed so that the number of gaming balls is 250 or less because the ball is being fired. This is because it is not executed.

  Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (50 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 150, and the number of games balls = 300 (game balls before update) Number) -50 (counted balls) = 250 data is backed up.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 50 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls. Further, CU3 indicates that a part of the counting operation has been invalidated, that the number of counting balls in the status information response is normally 100, “counting balls = 50” and “the number of gaming balls” = 250 "is specified. Therefore, the CU 3 displays on the display unit 54 that the counting operation has been invalidated in the middle (a part of the counting operation has been invalidated).

  The indication that the counting operation has been invalidated may be displayed at the moment of receiving a response of “number of counting balls = 50” as shown in the figure, or after all counting display is completed. It may be displayed. Or you may make it display continuously until the display of all the counts is complete | finished from the moment of receiving the response of "count ball number = 50". Further, specific data (bit ON / OFF) for notifying the CU that the counting operation has been invalidated in the middle may be included in the status information response.

  In this way, when the counting operation is performed during the execution of the game using the game balls and the game balls reach a predetermined number of points that are not converted any more, it is determined that the counting operation has been invalidated on the way. Therefore, the player can understand that the game balls are not counted any more.

  FIG. 44 shows an example in which an operation in which a player who is launching a ball further presses the count button 28 once to convert the game ball into a ball is detected. However, since the number of game balls is 250 in a state where balls are being fired in the game, the counting operation is invalidated even if the counting button 28 is pressed shortly for the same reason as described above.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P unit 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the counting operation is invalid, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = ON to the CU3. . The CU 3 specifies “counting operation was detected but invalidated” based on the data “number of counting balls = 0, counting = ON”. Based on this data, the CU 3 displays on the display 54 that the counting operation has been invalidated. When the counting operation to be invalidated is detected, the data “counting ball = 0, counting = ON” is transmitted only once, and in the response of the status information response thereafter, “counting = OFF " Further, specific data (bit ON / OFF) for notifying the CU that the counting operation is invalidated to the CU may be included in the status information response.

  Here, when the ball is being fired during the game, the condition of the number of game balls for invalidating the counting operation is not limited to 250 balls or less, but the speed for counting the number of game balls, You should decide appropriately considering the speed of launching.

  As described above, when a game using a game ball is performed, the counting operation is not effective unless there are more game points than the predetermined number. The timing when the game is continued and the timing when the remaining few game balls are consumed overlap, so that the game continues even though the game balls necessary for the game have been counted as holding balls It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player's disadvantage that a game ball is completely lost and a ball cannot be shot when a big hit or the like occurs.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the coin sharing process will be described. “Mobama sharing” means that the player divides and transfers the ball to another person. In FIG. 45, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “1000” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 1000, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  After that, when the player touches and specifies the ball sharing from a plurality of menus displayed on the display 54, for example (see FIG. 49 to FIG. 55), the CU3 has a ball sharing process. Will occur. The number of balls used for holding ball sharing is 100 balls.

  However, as described above, since the number of possessed balls is “0”, the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 controls the display 54 to display “Please press the count button for lack of possession”. Under the control, the display unit 54 displays “Please press the counting button because of the shortage of balls”. It should be noted that the display unit 54 displays during the “displaying” period shown in FIG. 45, for example, the displays shown in FIGS. 49 to 55.

  The player sees the indication “Please press the count button because of the shortage of balls” on the display 54, and presses the count button 28 for a short time to convert the game ball into a ball. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the initial number of game balls is “1000”, the number of game balls becomes “900” and the count ball becomes “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  As described above, when the number of remaining balls is less than the desired number of shared points, a predetermined notification is given, so that the player performs an operation of counting the number of game balls in order to receive a desired shared point service. Can be encouraged.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 900 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 900, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of balls is 1000 (pre-updated game balls) Number) -100 (count ball number) = 900 data is backed up. Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the operation of pressing the counting button 28 has not been performed, the P table 2 responds with a status information response including serial number = n + 5, number of gaming balls = 900, counting ball number = 0, counting = OFF. Is returned to CU3.

  As a result of the counting operation described above, the number of balls has reached “100”, so CU3 can secure the number of balls to be used for sharing the ball and after the ball is liquidated, the ball sharing process is completed. To do. Specifically, the liquidation of this ball is a process of subtracting the ball to be shared (divided and transferred) from the current number of balls (1000 balls), and is executed by the CU control unit 323.

  By executing this ball sharing process, the visitor card in which the number of balls to be shared (divided transfer) (100 balls) is recorded is ejected from the CU3, and the player hands it over to the other party who transfers the visitor card. As a result, the coins are shared (divided and transferred).

  Next, the wagon service process will be described with reference to FIG. The wagon service is a service in which goods such as drinks are provided to the player by consuming the ball. A player who desires a wagon service touches the display 54 (see FIGS. 56 to 62) and places a wagon order. Then, the order content ordered by the player is input as an infrared signal from the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU 3 to the remote controller owned by the store clerk. In addition to or in addition to the order input by the remote controller, the wagon service order operations by the player are collected using a LAN (Local Area Network) or the like, and the wagon service is performed according to the collected order contents. You may do it.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. In FIG. 46, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “30” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “60” balls.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 60, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs a wagon order by performing a touch operation as described above, so that processing of the wagon order occurs in CU3. The number of balls used for the wagon order is 70 balls.

  However, as described above, since the number of possessed balls is “30”, the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 controls the display 54 to display “Please press the count button for lack of balls”. Under the control, the display unit 54 displays “Please press the counting button because of the shortage of balls”. It should be noted that the display unit 54 performs the “displaying” period shown in FIG. 46, for example, the displays shown in FIGS. 56 to 62.

  In this way, when the remaining possession ball is less than the desired wagon service product amount, a predetermined notification is made, and the player is prompted to count the game balls to receive the desired wagon service. Can do.

  The player sees the indication “Please press the count button because of the shortage of balls” on the display 54, and presses the count button 28 for a short time to convert the game ball into a ball. When the count button 28 is pressed once, if there are 100 or more game balls, 100 balls are counted and counted as counting balls. For example, if the number of game balls is “160”, the counting operation counts the number of balls as “100” and the number of game balls becomes “60”. However, in this example, since the initial number of game balls is “60” balls, even if the count button 28 is pressed once, only 60 balls are counted, and the number of game balls is “0” balls, “60” balls. In this example, since it is assumed that the ball is not continuously fired when the counting button 28 is operated, the counting operation is not invalidated even if the number of game balls is less than 250.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 0 and the number of counting balls = 60, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 60, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (60 balls) to the number of balls (30 balls) and updates the number of balls to 90, and the number of game balls = 60 (game balls before update) Number) −60 (the number of balls counted) = 0. Further, the CU 3 receives the response of the state information response and starts display for counting 60 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the operation of pressing the counting button 28 has not been performed, the P table 2 responds with a status information response including serial number = n + 5, number of gaming balls = 0, number of counting balls = 0, counting in progress = OFF. Is returned to CU3.

  As a result of the counting operation described above, the number of held balls has become “90” balls, so CU3 can secure “70” balls for the number of wagons to be used, and pay the number of held balls (to the wagon order). After subtracting 70 balls, the wagon order processing is completed. Specifically, the liquidation of this ball is a process of subtracting the ball (70 balls) used for the wagon service from the current number of balls (90 balls), and is executed by the CU control unit 323. The payment when this wagon service is performed is, for example, in the same way as with the above-mentioned share of the ball, the ball used for the wagon service (70 balls) is written on the visitor card and discharged, and the visitor card is handed over to pay. Make a payment. As another method, a method may be used in which a terminal possessed by a staff member who performs a wagon service and the CU 3 communicate with each other to move a ball (70 balls) used for the wagon service to the terminal possessed by the staff member. Furthermore, a staff member who performs the wagon service may perform some operation on the CU 3 when the ordered product is delivered, and subtract the holding balls (70 balls) used for the wagon service based on the operation.

<Combination of game system configurations>
As shown in FIG. 5, the game system described above is provided with the counting button 28 on the P base 2, and the holding balls are not managed by the P base 2, but are managed by the CU 3. On the other hand, the management of the gaming balls is mainly performed. P display 2 is performed, displays 54 and 312 are provided on P table 2 and CU3, display control unit 350 is provided only on CU3, and display control of displays 54 and 312 is performed on the CU3 side. However, the gaming system according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, as another game system configuration, the counting button 28 is provided on the P base 2, the management of the game balls and holding balls is not performed on the P base 2, but performed on the CU 3, and the display is provided only on the P base 2 for display. The control unit 350 may be provided only in the CU3. Thus, there are a plurality of combinations of game system configurations. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a combination example of the configuration of such a gaming system.

  The configuration of the gaming system shown in FIG. 3, and the configuration of another game system described above is the combination No. 1 shown in FIG. 2. In FIG. 47, 18 combinations of game system configurations are described. However, no. No. 8 to no. 11 to No. 14 to No. Combinations up to 17 are no. 2 to No. Since the column of the counting buttons of up to 6 combinations can be replaced with the CU and CU / P units, the description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the significance of whether the ball management (management of the ball and management of the game ball) is performed by the CU or the P platform is, in part, the storage of the ball data. . For example, in the case of a gaming system in which the holding balls are stored only by the CU and the gaming balls are stored only by the P units, the management of the holding balls is the CU and the management of the gaming balls is the P unit.

  Or, the significance of whether the ball management (management of the ball, management of the game ball) is performed by the CU or the P stand is that the ball data is stored in both the CU and the P stand. When there is a difference between the two data, which data is used to correct the data. For example, in the case of the gaming system shown in FIG. 6, the game balls are stored in both the CU and the P units, but if there is a difference between the two data, the game is based on the data on the P unit side. Correct the ball. In this case, the management of game balls is P units.

<Example of processing of game system>
Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining the processing of the gaming system when there are a predetermined number or more of game balls. With reference to FIG. 48, the process of the payout control unit 171 when the number of game balls is a predetermined number or more and the process of the CU control unit 323 when the number of game balls is a predetermined number or more will be described.

  In the process when the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, first, the payout control unit 171 checks the current number of game balls of the P unit 2 (step S481). Specifically, the payout control unit 171 reads the current number of game balls stored in the RAM mounted on the P-side payout control board 17.

  Next, the payout control unit 171 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred during the game (step S482). When a big hit occurs during a game, the number of game balls tends to exceed a predetermined number, and the player may feel inconvenience if the counting operation is prompted each time or the game ball is stopped firing. Conceivable. Therefore, when the payout control unit 171 determines that a big hit has occurred in the game (step S482: YES), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing (return).

  If the payout control unit 171 determines that a big hit has not occurred during the game (step S482: NO), the payout control unit 171 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have been confirmed is greater than the 3000 full standard value ( Step S483). If the payout control unit 171 determines that there are more than 3000 confirmed game balls (step S483: YES), the payout control unit 171 transmits the game ball excess information to the CU control unit 323 (step S484). When the payout control unit 171 determines that the confirmed game balls are 3000 balls or less (step S483: NO), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing (return).

  When the CU control unit 323 receives the game ball excess information from the payout control unit 171 (step S488), the display unit 54 displays “The game ball is full. Please perform the count operation.” Is displayed (step S489).

  In this way, if the number of game balls is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, predetermined notification control is performed, and this makes it possible to simulate a system similar to the conventional game system that notifies when the ball is full on the plate. It is possible to provide a system that can be reproduced and is familiar to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system.

  In addition, when using data game balls instead of actual game balls as in this system, there is no inconvenience of being overwhelmed with a large amount of balls, so there is no upper limit on the number of game balls. You may do it. However, if no upper limit is set, the player and the game store when the game ball data is lost due to troubles in the P units when the player has acquired a very large number of game balls. The problem between and becomes greater. Therefore, as in this embodiment, an upper limit value is provided for the number of game balls in the form of a full tank, and when the number of game balls reaches the upper limit value, counting is promoted and converted into points, P units It is possible to prevent the amusement store's compensation amount from becoming too large in the event that trouble occurs and the game ball data is lost. In other words, by converting the number of game balls into the number of points according to the counting operation and storing it in the CU3, it is possible to store the converted number of points in the upper server via the CU3. Even if a trouble occurs, it is easy to guarantee compensation to the player by the number of points stored in the upper server.

  The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not the player has pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after performing the display for prompting the count operation (step S485). If the payout control unit 171 determines that the player has pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after the display for prompting the count operation (step S485: YES), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing. (return). It should be noted that when the notification such as a display prompting the counting operation is terminated, for example, when the counting button 28 is depressed, the full tank state is indicated. When the problem is solved, a predetermined fixed period of time has passed, or a combination of these may be used. When the counting button 28 is pushed down, the determination is made by the P stand 2 when the full state is eliminated, and the determination is made by the CU 3 when a predetermined fixed period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the determinations may be made on either the CU3 side or the P stand 2 side.

  If the payout control unit 171 determines that the player has not pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after the display for prompting the count operation (step S485: NO), the game control unit 171 stops the play of the game ball. That is, the payout control unit 171 stops the launching of the game ball by stopping the firing motor 18 via the firing control board 31 because the player does not perform the counting operation even after 10 seconds have passed since the counting operation is prompted. In this way, if the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and the counting operation is not performed, the game is disabled and the player can be prompted to perform the counting operation.

  The payout control unit 171 transmits to the CU control unit 323 that the game ball has been stopped because the counting operation is not performed even after 10 seconds have elapsed since the prompting of the counting operation, as the stop shooting information when the game ball is exceeded (Step 321). S487). Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 ends the processing (return).

  When the CU control unit 323 receives from the payout control unit 171 the launch stop information when the game ball is exceeded (step S490), the display 54 displays “The game ball is full. ”Is performed to stop the launch due to an excess of game balls (step S491). Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 ends the processing (return).

  As described above, the gaming system prompts the player to perform a counting operation when the number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number, so that a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full is simulated. A system that can be reproduced and that is familiar to players who are accustomed to conventional gaming systems can be provided.

49 to 62 are screen views displayed by the P display units 54.
First, based on FIG. 49 to FIG. 55, the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when performing the ball sharing shown in FIG. 45 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 49, the player selects and designates sharing of the ball from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. This state is the display screen for sharing money shown in FIG. The shared ball sharing (game ball split transfer) can be either split transfer from a player-owned ball or split transfer from a stored ball. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a ball sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a holding ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a storage ball are displayed.

  In the right half of the display screen of FIG. 49, the status of the currently inserted card is displayed. FIG. 49 shows that a membership card is inserted, and the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a holding ball of 0, a savings of 500 balls, and a current game ball of 1000 balls.

  Further, as the state of CU3, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending a game ball from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls corresponding to the 500 yen is the number of payout balls. Furthermore, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU3.

  The player touches either “mochidama” or “reserved ball” on the left half of the screen to select and input a ball sharing source. Here, a case where “mochitama” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “mochitama”, the screen shown in FIG. 50 is displayed next. The message “Please select the number of balls to be shared” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, Nine types of 400 balls and 500 balls are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “100 balls” is selected and input will be described.

  Normally, the number of shared balls is converted from the number of balls, but when the number of balls is larger than the number of balls, the screen shown in FIG. 51 is displayed. Specifically, the player has selected the number of balls to be shared as “100 balls”, but since there are no balls in the left half of the screen, “There are not enough balls. Please replenish "message is displayed. Thereby, the player is converted from the game balls to the number of shared balls by pushing the P counting buttons 28.

  50 and 51, the total number of balls (50 balls, 100 balls, 150 balls,..., 500 balls) to be selected for the sharing of the ball is displayed. It is possible to control so that only the number of balls within the range of the number of balls when executing is displayed, and the number of balls exceeding the range of the number of balls is not displayed. Alternatively, the number of balls exceeding the range of the number of balls may be displayed with an X mark. Further, it may be controlled to display up to the number of balls that can be shared by counting the number of game balls and adding it to the number of balls. In that case, while enclosing the number of balls that can be shared only with the number of balls in a solid line, while enclosing the number of balls that can be shared by counting the number of game balls and adding it to the number of balls, both It is also possible to control so as to distinguish and display.

  If the player converts “100 balls” for the number of shared balls from game balls to possession balls, the screen shown in FIG. 52 is then displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 52, a message “Are you sure you want to divide by the above details? Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the number of balls of your card is 900 as the details of the number of shared balls, The number is 100, and it is displayed that the number of balls of a shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to another person is 100. A display item (icon) of “start ball sharing” and a display item (icon) of “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of the ball is canceled. On the other hand, if “start ball sharing” is selected and input, ball sharing processing as shown in the details of the number of balls to be shared is started.

  If the player selects and inputs “start ball sharing”, then the screen shown in FIG. 53 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 53, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image showing the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. This ball sharing process status image has three types, 1, 2, and 3 as the processing order. In the first process, the player's (player) card is discharged, the shared card is discharged as the second process, and the third process. As reinserted my card is displayed as ejected. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which one's own card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  In the right half of the screen in FIG. 53, 900 balls that are currently playing balls on P cars are displayed. In this example, when the card is ejected, it is returned only after counting all the game balls, and since there is no operation by the return button, only the ball sharing operation is an exception. It should be noted that in order to eject the card, it may be possible to eject the card only after counting all the game balls, including during the coin sharing operation. In this case, the P table 2 performs a counting process before the card is discharged, and the number of counting balls is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  In addition, in this example, the case where there is one card insertion slot is explained, but when a card insertion slot is provided for inserting a membership card and a visitor card one by one and there are still game balls, Only the visitor card may be discharged without discharging the card. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the membership card from being discharged when the game balls remain.

  Further, in this example, it may be prompted to perform the counting process for all of the game balls first, and may be converted into a holding ball and shared and divided.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 54 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 54, the “status” column indicates that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed”, and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into CU3, the screen shown in FIG. 55 is then displayed. In FIG. 55, a message “ball sharing is complete” is displayed, and the ball sharing processing status indicates that all of the first process, the second process, and the third process have been completed. Since the sharing of the coins for 100 balls is completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in the P unit is 1000-100 = 900 and 900 balls.

  Next, FIGS. 56 to 62 are diagrams of display screens by the display unit 54 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 46 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 56, the display screen of FIG. 56 shows a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs the display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper half of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets 20” 4 types of menus are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  In the right half screen of FIG. 56, 30 balls are currently displayed as holding balls in P units, and 60 balls are displayed as the number of game balls. The selection of orders for wagon services can be made primarily within the range of the number of balls, but by actually using the counting buttons to convert the number of games to balls, the actual number of balls It becomes possible to the range which added the number of game balls to.

  Accordingly, the player can select a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 90 balls, considering that the current number of balls and the total number of game balls is 90 balls.

  For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 57 is displayed. In FIG. 57, a message “Please select the product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of balls necessary for ordering each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu considering that the current number of balls and the total number of game balls are 90 balls.

  On the display screen, PET bottles, which are menu items that can be purchased within the range of the possession balls, are indicated by solid lines, and the game balls are converted into possession balls using the counting buttons as the current possession balls. Menus that can be purchased by adding are indicated by dotted lines. Menus that cannot be purchased even if the game balls are converted into possession balls are indicated by “x”.

  For example, since the player has 30 balls and 60 balls, only the plastic bottle is displayed with a solid line and can be purchased with the balls. You can purchase game balls using canned coffee with 40 balls consumed, milk with 50 balls consumed, cafe au lait with 60 balls consumed, and coffee with 75 balls consumed. , Displayed as a dotted line. Further, even if both 30 balls and 60 game balls are used, the ice float with 100 consumed balls is not enough, so “x” is shown on the screen displaying the ice float.

  This display method is not limited to this, and a menu that can be purchased only with possession balls, a menu that can be purchased with the number of balls including the possession balls and game balls, and the number of balls including the possession balls and game balls are also purchased. Any display that can distinguish menus that cannot be used. For example, a menu that can be purchased with only balls is displayed brightly with a lamp, etc., and a menu that can be purchased with the number of balls that include balls and game balls is flashed and displayed. For menus that cannot be purchased even with the number of balls and game balls, it is possible to make the selection impossible without turning on the lamp or the like. Moreover, you may control so that the menu which cannot be purchased even with the number of balls which added the holding ball and the game ball is not displayed. Furthermore, in the case of the number of balls that cannot be purchased only with possession balls but with game balls added to the possession balls, the menu that can be purchased is displayed with a broken-line framework (see FIGS. 57 and 58). Such a menu may be displayed with a cross mark, or it may be controlled not to display such a menu.

  The display data downloaded from the security center server 802 described above may be purchased by the player using a ball. In that case, the display data may be handled as one of the above-mentioned wagon menus, and the player can touch the display 54 as in the above-described wagon service to display the data using the holding balls. Make data available for purchase. Further, when the display data is purchased using value data other than the possession ball, the display device 54 may be purchased by the player touching the display 54.

  An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 57, the screen is scrolled up and the lower part of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 57, the player selects the “PET BOTTLE” menu that requires 30 balls, and then touches the “ADD PRODUCT” icon displayed in the title column of “ORDER PRODUCT DETAIL” in FIG. Then, the display returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG.

  Here, since a PET bottle with 30 balls to be consumed is already scheduled to be purchased, the player can only order 60 balls even if he has his own balls and game balls. Therefore, in FIG. 58, “x” is displayed on the display so that the ice float with 100 consumed balls and the coffee with 75 consumed balls cannot be purchased. In addition, at this time point, the possession balls are applied to the PET bottles with 30 consumption balls, so that for future purchases, the game balls are converted to possession balls by using the counting buttons and purchased. Therefore, the menus other than the above are displayed with dotted lines.

  When the player finishes selecting the menu that he / she wants to purchase, the screen shown in FIG. 59 is then displayed, and the details of the ordered items that have been selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 59, it is shown that one “pet bottle” having 30 balls is ordered and one “can coffee” having 40 balls is ordered.

  It is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is 70 balls. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, if “delete” at the top is touched, the order of “pet bottle” is deleted, and the order of “can coffee” is deleted by touching the second “delete”.

  Further, an “add product” icon is displayed below the order product details, and when the player touches this, the display returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIGS. 57 and 58 again as described above. The player can select an order item and place an additional order.

  In addition, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 59, and the player can cancel all the order products that have been ordered so far by touching this icon.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “canned coffee” order on the display screen of FIG. 59, although not shown, the state where the “canned coffee” order has been canceled is shown. It is.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 59 and the number of balls consumed is larger than the number of balls, the game ball is displayed on the display screen so as to be converted to a ball. The For example, a message such as “There are not enough balls. Press the counting button to replenish the balls.” And the player is prompted to convert the gaming ball into a ball by the counting button. .

  When the above operation is performed, the screen shown in FIG. 60 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 60, all the gaming balls for 60 balls are converted into holding balls by pressing the counting button once for a short time, and the total number of balls is 90 balls. On the other hand, the number of game balls decreases from 60 balls to 0 balls. Normally, 100 gaming balls per short press of the counting button are converted into holding balls, but in the above case, all the gaming balls are converted because there are only 60 balls. Further, when starting the game again, for example, the ball lending button 321 is pressed to convert the ball into a game ball and start the game.

  When the above operation is completed, a screen shown in FIG. 61 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 61, an image being inquired about ordered products is displayed. An arrow is displayed indicating that transmission / reception is being performed between 70 balls, which is the total number of balls consumed, and 90 balls currently held on P cars, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 61, an arrow indicating that communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from the “70” balls consumed to the “90” balls of P units. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed in the direction from the “90” balls of P units to the “70” balls consumed, and the characters “inquiry” are displayed. Both these displays are repeated several times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 62 is displayed next. In the screen of FIG. 62, a message “The order product has been received. The number of consumption balls has been withdrawn from the holding ball.” Is displayed, and the order product reception completion is displayed. Details of the ordered product and the total number of consumed balls “70” are displayed. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that as a result of the consumption of 70 balls, the current number of balls and game balls in P units are “20” balls and “0” balls, respectively.

  In addition, the number of game balls is reduced due to the firing of balls while the display of “There are not enough balls. Press the counting button and replenish the balls” is displayed in FIG. 51 and FIG. When the number of possessed balls cannot be updated to the required number of possessed balls, the display control unit 350 performs control to display a message “The service cannot be selected because the number of game balls has decreased.”

  Also, in this example, the case where there is one card insertion slot is explained, but one card insertion slot for inserting a membership card and a visitor card is provided one by one, and the number of game balls compared to the number of balls consumed In the case where a visitor card is used to make a payment greater than the total number of balls, the visitor card may be discharged without discharging the membership card after the payment is completed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the membership card from being discharged when the game balls remain. Further, in this example, it may be prompted to perform the counting process for all of the game balls first, and the wagon service process may be started after being converted to a holding ball.

  FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing the relationship between P game boards and game frames (front frames) for fraud detection processing. Referring to FIG. 63, the pachinko machine (P stand) 2 includes a game board 26 and a game frame (front frame) 6.

  The game board 26 includes a main control board 16, and the game frame (front frame) 6 includes a payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 requests information from the main control board 16. On the other hand, the main control board 16 transmits to the payout control board 17 winning award information, the number of rounds, and the main control chip ID which will be described later with reference to FIG. The card unit 3 (CU3) includes a CU control unit 323 and a security board 325.

  The security board 325 makes a gaming machine chip information request, and in response to this request, the payout control board 17 transmits the main control chip ID, the payout control chip ID, etc. to the security board 325 as a response. The security board 325 transmits the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID to the CU control board 323.

  The CU control board 323 transmits the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID to the upper server 801, and inquires whether the main control chip ID and payout control chip ID are regular ones registered. Have you do. When the P machine 2 manufactured by the gaming machine maker is shipped to the game hall, the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID of the P machine 2 are transmitted from the gaming machine maker to the host server 801 for registration. Therefore, when the main control chip and the payout control chip of the P table 2 carried into the game hall are regular ones shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer, the CU control board 323 sends the main control chip ID to the upper server 801. When the payout control chip ID is transmitted and inquired, a reply indicating that it has been registered is returned. However, if the main control chip or the payout control chip is illegally modified, a reply indicating that the main control chip or the payout control chip is not registered and is inappropriate is returned from the upper server 801.

  The CU control board 323 enables a game by the P unit 2 on the condition that an appropriate answer has been returned. However, when an incorrect answer is returned, the P unit 2 is reset. It waits for reset to wait.

  The CU 3 is provided with a display control unit 350, and the display control unit 350 is connected to the CU control board 323 so as to be able to transmit and receive each other. The display control unit 350 includes a CPU as a control center, a ROM storing a control program, a RAM as a working area of the CPU, an EEPROM, an I / O port, a VDP (Video Display Processor), a VRAM (Video RAM). ) Etc. are provided. The display control unit 350 and a display (touch panel) 54 provided on the P base 2 are connected so as to communicate with each other. Then, display control of the display (touch panel) 54 provided on the P platform 2 is performed by the display control unit 350. If the touch panel of the display unit 54 is touched, the touch operation signal is transmitted to the display control unit 350.

  A host server 801 and a server (also referred to as a security center server) 802 provided in the security center 804 (refer to FIG. 76) are connected to be communicable with each other.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining information transmitted from the main control board 16 in response to an information request from the payout control board 17 in order to perform fraud detection processing. Referring to FIG. 64, the information to be transmitted includes (a) prize opening information, (b) round number information, and (c) main control chip ID information.

  First, regarding (a) winning opening information, information on the type of winning opening and the number of winning balls from the winning opening (the value of the number of game balls added at the time of winning the winning opening) is transmitted. The reason why such information is transmitted is to prevent the number of prize balls from being changed due to an illegal act so that the number of prize balls exceeding the normal number of prize balls is not paid out.

  For example, with respect to the start winning opening, there are start winning openings 1 to 3, and when one game ball is won in each starting winning opening, 3 balls are paid out as the number of winning balls, respectively.

  Similarly to the start winning opening, the normal winning openings 1 to 3 exist, and when one game ball is won in the normal winning opening, 5 balls are paid out respectively.

  Furthermore, there is only one winning prize opening, and when one game ball wins a prize winning opening, 15 balls are paid out as the number of winning balls.

  The winning award information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16.

  Next, regarding (b) round number information, there is a limit to the number of times that a big winning opening is opened at a normal jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds is 15 (15 rounds). If a big hit occurs, the number of 15 award balls is frequently sent to the payout control board 17, but for the purpose of preventing an illegal act such that this state continues even after exceeding the maximum number of rounds. Round number information is transmitted from the main control board 16.

  Next, since (c) main control chip ID information needs to be detected even when the main control board 16 itself is changed, “XXXXXXX” which is main control chip ID information is transmitted. This is transmitted to the payout control unit to determine whether or not the game board is appropriate.

  Here, control for performing fraud detection processing using the above information will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing control of fraud detection processing at power-on. Referring to FIG. 65, when activation of P units is started by turning on power of P units, etc., in step S651, game board information (main control chip ID, winning port information, The payout control board 17 of the game frame (front frame) 6 obtains the round number information).

  In step S652, the payout control board 17 is stored in a storage medium capable of storing stored information until the next power-on, such as the flash memory device, the hard disk device, and the backup RAM. Game board information (main control chip ID, winning opening information, round number information) is read into a RAM or the like.

  In step S653, the payout control board 17 transmits the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID transmitted when the power is turned on to the CU3 side. For example, the CU 3 side makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 for the transmitted main control chip ID and payout control chip ID.

  In step S654, the payout control board 17 determines whether or not the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17.

  If the payout control board 17 determines that the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on and the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17 are the same, the process proceeds to step S655, and the winning opening Information identity is determined.

  On the other hand, if the payout control board 17 determines that the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is not the same as the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17, the process proceeds to step S659. move on.

  Next, in step S655, the payout control board 17 determines whether or not the winning opening information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the winning opening information already held in the payout control board 17.

  If the payout control board 17 determines that the winning opening information transmitted and acquired when the power is turned on and the winning opening information already held in the payout control board 17 are the same, the process proceeds to step S656, and the round number information Identity is determined.

  On the other hand, if the payout control board 17 determines that the winning opening information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on and the winning opening information already held in the payout control board 17 are not the same, the process proceeds to step S658. Fraud detection information is transmitted to the upper server 801. At this time, error display control using an abnormality notification lamp or the like may be performed.

  Next, in step S656, the payout control board 17 determines whether or not the round number information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the round number information already held in the payout control board 17.

  If the payout control board 17 determines that the round number information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the round number information already held in the payout control board 17, the process proceeds to step S657.

  On the other hand, if the payout control board 17 determines that the round number information transmitted and acquired when the power is turned on is not the same as the round number information already held in the payout control board 17, the process proceeds to step S658. Fraud detection information is transmitted to the upper server 801. At this time, error display control using an abnormality notification lamp or the like may be performed.

  Following the processing in step S655 and step S656, fraud detection information is transmitted from the payout control unit 171 in step S658, and the processing ends (return).

  Further, after the processing of step S654, the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained at the time of power-on in step S659 is not the same as the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17, An inquiry result as to whether or not the control chip ID is already registered in the upper server 801 is acquired.

  The processes in steps S659 and S660 are provided for the following purposes. Usually, when a new P unit is installed, only the game board may be exchanged (board exchange) in order to reduce the normal cost. In this case, the main control chip ID of the exchanged game board is different from the main control chip ID held on the payout control board. It is necessary to prohibit transmission of fraud detection information when the main control chip ID is different due to such panel replacement.

  Therefore, when installing a new game board, the main control chip ID or the like is first registered in the upper server 801. Therefore, is the main control chip ID transmitted from the main control board registered in the upper server 801? The host server 801 determines whether or not and sends the inquiry result to the payout control board 17 via the CU3. Next, the process proceeds to S660.

  If it is determined in step S660 that the inquiry result is appropriate (the main control chip ID stored in the host server 801 is the same as the main control chip ID transmitted from the main control unit 161), the process proceeds to step S657. Processing proceeds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the inquiry result is not appropriate (the main control chip ID stored in the host server 801 is the same as the main control chip ID transmitted from the main control unit 161), the process proceeds to step S670. In step S670, an abnormality process is performed, and the process ends (return).

  Following the processing of step S656 and step S660, in step S657, the game board information (main control chip ID, winning mouth information, round number information) transmitted from the main control board 16 is held in the payout control board 17, Processing ends (return). The payout control board 17 has a storage medium such as a flash memory device, a hard disk device, and a backup RAM that can store stored information until the next power-on even when the power is turned off. The board information (main control chip ID, winning opening information, round number information) is stored and held.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing during a game. Referring to FIG. 66, in step S661, payout control board 17 obtains information on the addition counter of the main control board. Next, in step S <b> 662, the payout control board 17 reads the winning opening information held on the payout control board 17.

  In step S663, whether or not the increase amount (increasing number of game balls) of the addition number counter in the polling interval can be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17 shown in FIG. Determine whether.

  The relationship between the winning opening information shown in FIG. 64 and the game information shown in FIG. 11 will be described. The type of winning opening and the number of winning balls shown in FIG. 64 correspond to the type information and winning ball information in FIG. 11, respectively.

  Specifically, the start winning holes 1 to 3 indicate the game type information 1 to 3 of the type information 1 to 3 in FIG. 11, respectively. The game prize ball information 1 to 3 is shown respectively.

  Next, the normal winning openings 1 to 3 indicate the game type information 4 to 6 of the type information 4 to 6 in FIG. 11, respectively, and the five balls which are the number of prize balls are game awards of the prize ball information 4 to 6 of FIG. Sphere information 4 to 6 is shown respectively.

  Further, the special winning opening indicates the game type information 7 of the type information 7 of FIG. 11, and 15 balls, which is the number of the winning balls, indicate the game prize ball information 7 of the prize ball information 7 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step S663 that the increment amount (increased number of game balls) of the addition counter at the polling interval can be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17, fraud detection Information is not transmitted, and the process ends (return). Specifically, when the increased number of game balls is 9, based on FIG. 64, it can be generated when 3 balls are won in the start winning port 1 or when 1 ball is simultaneously won in the start winning ports 1 to 3. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S663 that the increase amount (increase number of game balls) of the addition counter at the polling interval cannot be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17 The process proceeds to step S664. Specifically, when the increased number of game balls is 7, based on FIG. 64, 7 balls cannot be generated by any combination.

  In step S664, fraud detection information notifying the gaming machine that some kind of fraud has been performed is transmitted to CU3, and the process ends (return). This “fraud detection information” specifically refers to “fraud detection information 1” in FIG. The CU 3 that has received the fraud detection information 1 performs abnormality notification using the abnormality notification lamp, notifies the higher server 801 to that effect, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  In S663, it is determined whether or not the increase amount (increasing number of game balls) of the addition number counter in the polling interval can be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17. In addition, in addition to this, the information of the addition number counter transmitted from the main control board 161 during the game may be compared with the stored round number information to determine whether or not they match. . That is, when the state where the number of additions transmitted from the main control board 161 is increasing exceeds the number of rounds (15 times) of the jackpot, it is determined that there is an abnormality.

  FIG. 67 is an example of a diagram displayed as a dollar box display on the display 312 of CU3. Referring to FIG. 67, as described with reference to FIG. 43, a dollar box display is performed on the display 312 on the CU3 side according to the number of balls acquired in the current (current) game due to a big hit or the like.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls acquired in the current game is positive as the cumulative number of added balls minus the total number of subtracted balls. Alternatively, the number of balls acquired in the current game may be the current number of game balls + current number of balls-number of balls at the start of the game. The dollar box display may be started when the number of balls acquired in the current game becomes positive regardless of the counting operation.

  The dollar box display is not limited to the conditions displayed when the number of balls acquired in this game is positive. For example, when the number of balls acquired in this game exceeds 1000 balls The conditions may be changed, for example, displayed on the screen.

  If the number of balls acquired in the current (current) game increases, the number of empty ball boxes 621 decreases and the number of ball boxes 622 filled with game balls increases. On the other hand, if there is no big hit and the number of game balls decreases, the number of ball boxes 622 decreases and the number of empty ball boxes 621 increases. Note that the dollar box display is not limited to the increase / decrease of the ball boxes 621 and 622, and although not shown, the color of the dollar box display may be changed according to the change in the number of game balls. Further, a ball box 622 may appear according to a change in the number of game balls.

  This dollar box display starts calculating the number of balls acquired in the current (current) game on the CU3 side at the same time as the game is started. Here, the calculation is performed on the CU3 side, but the calculation may be performed on the P stand 2 side and the result may be notified to the CU3 side.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart for explaining the operation process of the replay button 319 in FIG. Referring to FIG. 68, in step S681, the player (user) presses down the replay button 319 in FIG. 1, whereby the process of the replay button 319 is started.

  In step S682, it is determined whether or not the counting process from game balls to holding balls is being executed. By step S682, it is possible to prevent the lending process by the replay button 319 for converting from the holding ball to the game ball from competing with the counting process which is a process opposite to the lending process.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the counting process from game balls to holding balls is being executed, the process proceeds to step S684. In step S684, since the operation by the replay button 319 and the counting operation are in conflict, the operation of pressing the replay button 319 is invalidated, and the process ends (return). When the operation of depressing the replay button 319 is invalidated, the display of the message 54, 312 or the like may be performed such that “the operation of the replay button is invalidated because the counting process is in progress”. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S682 that the counting process from game balls to holding balls is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S683. Next, in step S683, the lending process from the holding ball to the game ball is executed by the operation of the replay button 319, and the process ends (return).

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart for explaining the counting button operation processing. Referring to FIG. 69, in step S691, when the player (user) presses down counting button 28 in FIG. 1, the operation process of counting button 28 is started.

  In step S692, it is determined whether or not the lending process from the possession ball to the game ball (the operation process for the replay button 319) is being executed. As in step S682 of FIG. 68, this prevents the lending process by the replay button 319 for converting from the holding ball to the game ball in step S692 from competing with the counting process, which is a process opposite to the lending process. Is done.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the lending process from the possession ball to the game ball is being executed, the process proceeds to step S698. In step S697, since the operation by the replay button 319 and the counting operation are in conflict, the operation of depressing the counting button is invalidated, and the process ends (return). When the operation of depressing the count button 28 is invalidated, the display 54, 312 or the like displays a message that “the count button operation is invalidated because the ball lending process from holding balls / storage balls is in progress”. You may do it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the lending process from the holding ball to the game ball is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S693. Next, in step S693, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress at the time this process is being performed.

  If it is determined in step S693 that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S694, and it is further determined whether or not the minimum required number of game balls in the game is 250 balls or more. Here, the minimum required number of game balls is described as 250 balls, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the minimum required number of game balls can be arbitrarily set.

  If it is determined in step S694 that the current number of game balls is 250 balls or more, the process proceeds to step S695. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of game balls is less than 250 balls, the process proceeds to step S698. The processing in step S694 is provided because it is desirable in the system to secure the minimum required number of balls for managing the number of balls in the game.

  Step S695 shows counting control in the case of long press, but shows another example different from the control of FIG. In step S695, the number of game balls (number of processed balls) to be counted per second from the current number of game balls is determined. For example, if the current number of game balls is 10000 balls or more, the number of processed balls is 2500 balls. If the current number of game balls is 5000 or more and less than 10000 balls, the number of processed balls is 2000 balls. If the number of game balls is 1000 balls or more and less than 5000 balls, the number of processed balls is 1000 balls. If the current number of game balls is 200 balls or more and less than 1000 balls, the number of processed balls is 200 balls. If the number of game balls is less than 200 balls, the number of game balls is set as the current number of game balls, and the process proceeds to step S696.

  In step S696, counting processing from game balls to holding balls is executed according to the set number of processing balls. For example, if the current number of game balls is 15000 balls, wait for 1 second after counting 2500 balls, and repeat the operation of counting 2500 balls again after 1 second has passed. By repeating the operation 6 times, the counting of all balls is completed over 5 seconds. Next, the process proceeds to step S697.

  The control for displaying the counting operation for a plurality of times in step S696 on the display 54 as needed is executed in step S697, and the process ends (return). If the current number of game balls is 15000 balls, wait until 1 second elapses after counting 2500 balls, and when 1 second elapses, the operation of counting the 2500 balls is repeated 6 times. A state where the counting of all the balls is completed over a second is displayed on the display 54.

  Following the processing in steps S692 and S694, in step S698, the operation of depressing the counting button is invalidated, and the processing ends (return). In step S698, the ball lending process, which is the reverse of the counting process, or the invalidation of the counting process request for the number of game balls that is less than the minimum required number of game balls that is inappropriate for the management of the number of balls being played Is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the number of counting balls counted in one counting operation differs depending on the number of gaming balls acquired by the player, so even if there are relatively many gaming balls The number of counting operations required to count all the game balls is not extremely increased, and the operability of the counting button can be improved thereby.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the display of the counting operation. In the above embodiment, the number of balls to be counted for the game ball is determined by the number of times and the time for which the counting button 28 is depressed. In this modification, instead of the counting button 28, a total counting button 28a and a partial counting button 28b as shown in FIG. 70 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display 54.

  Referring to FIG. 70, a total counting button 28a and a partial counting button 28b are displayed on the left half of the screen. The all counting button 28a is a button for performing all counting processing for converting all of the number of game balls into a possession ball. On the other hand, the partial counting button 28b is a button for performing a partial counting process for converting a part of the number of game balls into a holding ball. For example, the partial counting button 28b is used when sharing a ball or using a wagon service.

  On the other hand, a numeric keypad 28c is displayed on the right half of the screen, and the numeric keypad 28c includes 0-9 numeric keys, a clear key (C), and an equal key (=). In this example, the number key, the clear key, and the equal key are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and keys for providing various functions can be arranged.

  The player uses the numeric keypad 28c to input the number of game balls to be counted and inputs an equal key. Thereby, the number of game balls to be counted is determined. Thereafter, by pressing the partial counting button 28b, the desired number of game balls can be converted into a possession ball. Here, the operation has been described with the operation of pressing the partial counting button 28b after inputting and confirming the game ball to be counted first using the numeric keypad 28c, but not limited thereto, after pressing the partial counting button 28b, After inputting the number of game balls to be counted, an equal key is input to start the counting process.

  If the number of game balls to be counted is erroneously input, the desired number of game balls to be converted can be input again after inputting the clear key.

  The number of game balls that have been input is displayed on the display portion at the top of the numeric keypad 28c. By confirming this display portion, the player can confirm whether or not the requested number of game balls is being input.

  In the case of adopting such a modified example, all counting operations and partial counting operations of game balls are possible, so that it is possible to count a part of balls with each counter It is possible to provide a new system using game ball data in a form close to that of the game system.

  Since the display unit 54 is controlled by the CU 3 side (see FIG. 5), a touch operation signal on the touch panel of the display unit 54 is input to the CU 3 side without passing through the P stand 2. Therefore, when the modified example as shown in FIG. 70 is adopted, it is necessary to transmit the touch operation signal of the touch panel input to the CU 3 from the CU 3 to the payout control unit 171 on the P platform side. Such a touch operation signal may be included in the status information request, for example. Further, the display as shown in FIG. 70 may be performed on the CU side display 312. Similarly in this case, it is necessary to transmit the touch operation signal of the touch panel input to the CU 3 from the CU 3 to the payout control unit 171 on the P platform side. In addition to the display unit 54 and the display unit 312, a dedicated display unit with a dedicated touch panel is provided, and the dedicated display unit for counting is controlled by controlling the dedicated display unit on the P table 2 side. Display as shown in FIG. 70 may be performed, and the touch operation signal may be directly input to the P base 2. Further, a screen as shown in FIG. 70 may be displayed on both the CU-side display 312 and the P-side display 54 according to the player's selection. Furthermore, the counting operation button may be displayed on the screen as described above while leaving the counting button 28 shown in FIG. 1, or when this modification is adopted, the counting button shown in FIG. 28 may be deleted.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart for explaining control of the payout control unit 171 and the CU control unit 323 by the radio wave sensor. Referring to FIG. 71, regarding the control of payout control unit 171 by the radio wave sensor, in step S711, notification of game board radio wave sensor detection from main control unit 161 or notification of game frame radio wave sensor detection is issued to payout control unit 171. Determine if it has been done.

  If it is determined in step S711 that the payout control unit 171 has been notified of the game board radio wave sensor detection or the game frame radio wave sensor detection from the main control unit 161, the process proceeds to step S714.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout control unit 171 has not been notified of the game board radio wave sensor detection and the game frame radio wave sensor detection from the main control unit 161, the process proceeds to step S712, and the game board or game frame is detected. The notification of the disconnection detection of the radio wave sensor possessed by is determined.

  In step S712, as described above, it is determined whether or not the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection notification or the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection input has been made to the payout control unit 171 from the main control unit 161.

  Here, as a method of detecting disconnection of the radio wave sensor, signal level detection of the radio wave sensor detection signal is performed. Specifically, three types of radio wave sensor detection signals are used: H level, L1 level, and L0 level. The signal level of the radio wave sensor when notification of radio wave sensor detection is made due to fraudulent action is set to H level, the signal level of the radio wave sensor is set to L0 (ground potential level) due to disconnection, and the signal level L1 (> L0) of a normal radio wave sensor ), It is possible to detect disconnection. Here, the method of notifying disconnection detection by signal level detection has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the signal levels H and L1 may be set to the same level. This eliminates the need to detect a complicated signal level, thereby reducing costs.

  Further, in the above example, the detection is performed by measuring the voltage of each signal, but it can also be detected by measuring each current.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the payout control unit 171 has received notification of game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection from the main control unit 161 or input of game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection, the process proceeds to step S714.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection notification and the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection input are not made from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171, the process proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, the payout control unit 171 determines that neither the gaming board radio wave sensor nor the game frame radio wave sensor has detected an illegal act, and the process ends (return).

  Following the processing of step S711 and step S721, in step S714, the payout control unit 171 determines that fraud has been detected in the game board radio wave sensor or the game frame radio wave sensor. In step S715, the process is terminated (return) by notifying the CU 3 that fraud has been detected (illegal notice).

  On the other hand, in step S716, the CU control unit 323 receives the fraud notification from the payout control unit 171 by the process in step S715, and the process proceeds to step S717.

  In step S717, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall management computer of fraud, and the process proceeds to step S718.

  In step S718, the CU control unit 323 activates the abnormality notification lamp, and the process ends (return). By operating the abnormality notification lamp, the hall manager can check the operation status of the gaming machine that may be fraudulent in a short time and prevent fraud. .

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 80 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing specific control of the display data acquisition sequence shown in FIG. Since the display data acquisition sequence is a process in which the CU 3 downloads and stores display data from the security center server 802 as described above, in FIG. Control on one device is shown. Note that an upper server 801 is interposed between the CU 3 and the security center server 802. Since the upper server 801 merely mediates transmission and reception of data, the illustration is omitted in FIG. doing.

  Referring to FIG. 72, CU3 first determines whether or not display data has been acquired in S800. If the display data corresponding to the P unit 2 among the display data stored in the database 803 of the security center server 802 has already been downloaded and stored, YES is determined in S800 and the display data is stored. The data acquisition sequence ends. On the other hand, if display data has not yet been acquired, display data acquisition control in S801 and thereafter is executed. Therefore, the CU 3 requests the security center server 802 to distribute display data (image data and model-corresponding data) corresponding to the P base 2 when the power is turned on at the first connection with the P base 2 for display. The data is downloaded and stored, and then a determination of YES is made in S800, and display data acquisition control in S801 and thereafter is not executed.

  A NO determination is made in S800, and the gaming machine chip information is requested to the P unit 2 in S801. As described with reference to FIG. 63, the gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID and a payout chip ID, and is configured with a unique ID unique to each P unit 2. Therefore, if the P stand 2 is different, the gaming machine chip information is also different data. Upon receiving the gaming machine chip information request, the P table 2 returns a gaming machine chip information response to the CU 3 in S802. This gaming machine chip information response is information including the main control chip ID and the payout chip ID stored in the P table 2.

  In response to this, the CU 3 transmits a display data request together with the received gaming machine chip information to the security center server 802 via the upper server 801 in S803. The security center server 802 receives it, searches for display data stored in the database 803 (see FIG. 76) in association with the received gaming machine chip information in S804, and searches for it in S805. The display data is returned to the CU 3 via the upper server 801.

  The CU 3 receives it and stores the received display data in S806. This storage is performed by a memory such as an EEPROM provided in the display control unit 350 shown in FIG. Next, in S807, setting processing such as a scaler is performed based on the model-corresponding data. This model-compatible data is data such as the size of the display device included in the display data, and is displayed on the display device 54 based on the data such as the size of these display devices corresponding to the model of the P unit 2. Set the screen size of the image to be displayed.

  In addition, the setting process based on the model-corresponding data is not limited to the setting of the scaler or the like. For example, in the case of a model not provided with the display unit 54, the display control of the display unit 54 is not performed. Various settings such as setting the resolution according to the total number of pixels of the display 54 are included.

  In the authentication sequence (see FIG. 33) executed immediately before this display data acquisition sequence, as described above, the CU acquires gaming machine chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) from the P units. At this stage, the gaming machine chip information acquired by the CU may be transmitted to the security center server 802 so that display data is returned from the security center server 802. In this case, the display data acquired by the CU 3 is used for display control on the display unit 54 on the condition that an appropriate authentication result is obtained in the authentication sequence.

  In the present embodiment, the database of the security center 804 shows the display data stored in association with the gaming machine chip information. However, the gaming machine chip information is merely an example. The display data may be stored in association with the manufacturer specifying information for specifying the manufacturer of the table 2. In that case, manufacturer specific information for specifying the manufacturer of the P unit is stored in the P unit 2, the CU 3 receives the manufacturer specific information from the P unit 2, and the display data together with the received manufacturer specific information. Control is performed so that the request is transmitted to the security center server 802, the display data stored in the database 803 in the security center server 802 is searched based on the manufacturer specifying information, and the searched display data is returned to the CU3. To do.

  As described above, when the display data created by the gaming machine manufacturer is downloaded, it is downloaded through the route of the security center server 802 → the upper server 801 → CU3. Is downloaded by the route of the security center server 802 → the management computer for hall → CU3.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing control of the display 54 by the display control unit 350 (see FIGS. 5 and 63) of the CU3. First, referring to FIG. 73 (a), it is determined in S810 whether or not there has been a switching operation of the effect type. As shown in FIG. 76, the display data includes a plurality of types of image data such as first type image data and second type image data, and which image data is used for display. The player can select whether to display the effect by the device 54. Note that the image data that can be selected by the player is not limited to two types of the first type image data and the second type image data, and any number may be used as long as there are three or more types. As long as it can be selected from a plurality. If the player performs an operation to display a menu screen of an effect type that can be displayed by touching the touch panel of the display unit 54, a determination of YES is made in S810, and the menu screen of the effect type is displayed in S811. . If the player who sees it designates the desired effect type from the displayed effect types by touch operation, the selection of the specified effect type is accepted in S812, and the image data to be used is selected in S813. Processing for updating the image data corresponding to the selected effect type is performed. Here, “update” means that the image data to be displayed on the display 54 is updated to the image data selected by the player. Specifically, all of the image data that can be selected by the player is downloaded from the security center server 802 and stored in a memory such as an EEPROM of the display control unit 350 (see S806). Image data used for display on the display unit 54 is stored in a RAM or the like from the image data, and the display unit 54 is controlled to display using the image data stored in the RAM or the like. In S813, the display image data stored in the RAM is updated to image data corresponding to the effect type selected by the player.

  If the image data selected by the player is not stored in a memory such as an EEPROM of the display control unit 350, the image data not stored is downloaded from the security center server 802 and stored. Also good.

  As a specific example of the player selection in S810 to S812, for example, when the player inserts a card into the CU3 to start the game, a menu screen including icons for changing the effect type and the current time are displayed. The type of image data (for example, a general festival displayed on the background) is displayed on the display 54. When the player who sees it wants to switch to other image data, the icon for effect type switching operation is clicked to display an effect display menu screen. On the menu screen, icons representing all selectable image data types are displayed. For example, icons such as general festival, danji festival, Gion festival, Tenjin festival are displayed. If the player clicks on a desired icon, the player can switch to the production type corresponding to the icon. Note that the time when the player is allowed to select is not limited to when the card is inserted as described above. For example, the selection may be permitted during the demonstration display, or may be permitted at any time during the game. Good.

  Next, control proceeds to S814, where it is determined whether or not a variable start condition is satisfied based on the game information / type information. As described with reference to FIG. 15, the “game information / type information” is data indicating the type of the winning opening where the ball has won and the number of times that the variable symbol of the variable display device 278 has stopped. These data are transmitted from the P platform 2 to the display control unit 350 via the security board 325 and the CU control unit 323, and based on the data, whether or not the ball has won the start opening and varies based on the start win The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the symbol being stopped has stopped. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the variable display device 278 is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10th time) after the previous variable display control of the display device 54 is executed, the variable start condition is established by S814. The variable display control process of S815 is executed. This variable start condition is not limited to the tenth variable display of the variable display device 278 as described above. For example, each time the variable display device 278 is variably displayed, the display 54 is variably displayed and controlled. Also good. Further, the information indicating that the reach has been reached may be received from the P base 2, and it may be determined whether or not the variable start condition is satisfied in S814, taking into account the number of times the reach has been reached. For example, it may be determined that the variable start condition is satisfied when the variable display device 278 has reached 10 fluctuations or the reach is established 5 times, whichever is the earlier condition. Good.

  Next, referring to FIG. 73 (b), the control of the subroutine program of the variable display control process in S815 will be described. First, in S820, control is performed to execute variable display of the variable display device 54 using image data stored in the RAM or the like of the display control unit 350 described above. Next, in S821, it is determined whether or not the number of symbol stops in the game information / type information has been updated. If it has not been updated yet, the variable display control process ends. On the other hand, when the variable display on the variable display device 278 is terminated and the symbol is stopped, YES is determined in S821 every time the symbol stop count in the symbol information / type information is updated by “1”. By S822, it is determined whether or not the big hit in the game table information 2 is set. As described with reference to FIG. 11, the “game table information 2” means whether or not a big hit is being made, whether or not the special symbol establishment variation function is in operation, whether or not the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation. This data is transmitted to the display control unit 350 via the security board 325 and the CU control unit 323 from the P base 2. When the big hit is set in this gaming machine state 2, it is the time when the big hit symbol is displayed by the variable display device 278, and the control advances to S823, and the display 54 displays the winning display result. Is done. For example, control such as stopping and displaying a symbol pattern such as “777” on the display 54 is performed. Next, proceeding to S824, a process of giving predetermined digital contents to the player is performed. This digital content provision is, for example, processing such as transmitting digital content data to a player's mobile phone. As digital contents, for example, points on the game hall, characters to be displayed on a standby screen of a mobile phone, and input to the game machine at the next game machine and subsequent effects are displayed on the variable display device 278 and the display 54. An item that can be used in a game such as a character to be played or a social game is conceivable.

  In addition, as a method of giving digital content to a player, instead of giving the digital content data itself to the player (sending it to a mobile phone), a two-dimensional code or the like is issued, and the two-dimensional code or the like is given to the player May read the content with a mobile phone or the like, access a corresponding content distribution site, and download the digital content from there to the mobile phone or the like.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S822, the control advances to S825, and control is performed to display the display result that has been removed from the display 54. For example, irregular symbols such as “281” are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the variable display control process. In the case of the variable display control process of FIG. 73 (b) described above, the display 54 corresponding to the display result of the variable display device 278 is controlled to be derived and displayed. In the case of the variable display control process in the modification, the control contents may be that the winning result is displayed as a result of the lottery on the display unit 54 even when the display result of the variable display device 278 is out of place. Differences from the variable display control process of FIG. 73 (b) will be mainly described.

  In step S830, variable display is performed using the image data, and the random counter is updated in steps S831 to S833. This random counter counts up from 0, for example, returns to “0” when the upper limit value (for example, 10) is reached, and counts up from 0 again. Specifically, the random counter is incremented by “1” and updated by S831, and it is determined whether or not the random counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 10). If not, the process proceeds to S834. If it is, processing for setting the random counter to “0” is performed in S833.

  Next, in S834, it is determined whether or not the number of symbol stops in the game information / type information has been updated. If it has not been updated, the variable display control process ends. On the other hand, when the variable display of the variable display device 278 is stopped and the symbol stop count is updated by adding “1”, a determination of YES is made in S834 and the process proceeds to S835, and whether or not the random counter is “1”. Judgment is made. When “1”, control is performed to display the winning display result (for example, a symbol pattern such as 777) on the display unit 54 at S836, and processing to give predetermined digital content to the player is performed at S837. It is.

  On the other hand, if the random counter is not “1”, the control advances to S838, and the display 54 is controlled to display a display result that is out of order (for example, irregular symbols such as 183).

  The timing at which the variable display device 278 stops, that is, the timing at which YES is determined at S834 is not uniform, but is random timing, and therefore the determination at S835 as to whether or not the random counter is “1” is also random timing. Will be performed. As a result, the winning display result of S836 is displayed at random with a probability of 1/10.

  Instead of such random display, the display 54 is controlled to be variably displayed and the selected display result is always derived and displayed when the variable display count reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). May be.

  Further, when the display result of the variable display device 278 is a win, the display result of the winning display is displayed on the display unit 54 with a probability of 100% or relatively high (for example, 80%), and the display result of the variable display device 278 is not correct. In some cases, the display result of the winning may be displayed on the display unit 54 with a relatively low probability (for example, 10%).

  Further, the variable display on the display unit 54 does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the variable display time by the variable display device 278 of the gaming machine, and may be always a variable display of a fixed time, for example. Furthermore, the lottery timing for determining whether or not to win may be set at the start of variable display. By doing so, it is possible to standardize the display control process by determining whether to display the winning symbol or the off symbol when the variable display is stopped and then determining the symbol, and the display control processing is missing. The inconvenience of doing so can be prevented.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the control processing of the security center server 802, where (a) shows a main routine, (b) shows a subroutine program for registration processing from the manufacturer, and (c) shows a subroutine program for marketplace operation processing. It is a flowchart.

  Referring to FIG. 75A, the security center server 802 performs a registration process from the manufacturer in S840. In the registration process from this manufacturer, display data displayed on the display 54 of the new gaming machine by the gaming machine manufacturer when the new gaming machine is manufactured and shipped is received from the gaming machine manufacturer and stored in the database 803. It is processing to do. Next, marketplace operation processing is performed in S841. In this marketplace operation processing, the server 802 operates a marketplace that mediates display data buying and selling transactions between a buyer consisting of a plurality of game halls (halls) and a supplier consisting of a plurality of display data creators. It is processing.

  A subroutine program for registration processing from the manufacturer will be described with reference to FIG. First, in S845, it is determined whether or not there is a registration request from the gaming machine maker. If there is no registration request, this process ends. When a gaming machine manufacturer manufactures and ships a new gaming machine, it requests the security center server 802 to register the gaming machine. Then, a determination of YES is made in S845, the control proceeds to S846, and processing for receiving the gaming machine chip information and display data is performed. The gaming machine manufacturer makes a registration request to the security center server 802, and then displays gaming machine chip information of a new gaming machine to be shipped and display data (image data and model) to be displayed on the display 54 in the gaming machine. (Including corresponding data) to the security center server 802. The transmitted gaming machine chip information and display data are received in S846. In S847, the received display data is stored in the database 803 in association with the gaming machine chip information. FIG. 76 shows a state where display data is stored in association with gaming machine chip information. Note that the image data included in the display data is created by a multi-document game machine maker and stored in the database 803 as the first type image data and the second type image data.

  Next, a subroutine program for marketplace operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in S850, a process for displaying the Web page to a visitor who has visited the marketplace Web site is performed. This Web page is the menu screen of FIG. 78, and displays a message “Please select a menu” and icons for displaying various menus. Next, in S851, it is determined whether or not new machine information has been registered by the gaming machine manufacturer. This registration of new machine information is a process of registering data such as a board surface / spec, a game flow, a reach action, or a notice action of a new gaming machine manufactured and sold by a gaming machine manufacturer. Registers data for reference when creating display data. If no new machine information is registered from the manufacturer, the control advances to S853. On the other hand, if the gaming machine maker viewing the Web page shown in FIG. 78 clicks on the new machine registration icon from the maker, a determination of YES is made in S851 and control advances to S852 to accept and store the registration of new machine information. Processing is done. As described above, the new machine information is data such as a board surface / spec, a game flow, a reach action, a notice action, and the like. The server 802 accepts these data and stores them in the database 803.

  Next, in S853, it is determined whether or not there is a request for writing / viewing a request for display from a hall or a player. A game hall (hall) or a player who is a buyer on the marketplace may have a request for an image to be displayed by the display 54. Such a request can be written on a Web page. Moreover, it is comprised so that the written request can be browsed. It can be used as a reference for the development of display data in which the display data creator browses the writing.

  If there is no request for writing / viewing, the control advances to S855. On the other hand, by clicking on the registered model list from the menu screen shown in FIG. 78 and displaying a list of registered models consisting of the manufacturer name and model name, clicking on one of the models, data related to that model, for example, Icons for displaying the board surface / spec, game flow, reach action, notice action, and the like are displayed, and an icon for writing and browsing is also displayed. By clicking this write / browse icon, a determination of YES is made in S853, the control advances to S854, and a write / browse corresponding process is performed. The writing / browsing handling process is a process of displaying the written content already written and displaying a writing field for newly writing. When a writing operation is performed in the writing field, the written content is stored in the database 803 and displayed so that it can be viewed. As the written contents, for example, “I would like you to create image data that displays a moving image of Kishiwada's Danjiri Festival” as written from a game hall (hall) in Kishiwada.

  Next, in S855, it is determined whether or not there has been a request for registration of the created display data. If not, the control advances to S857. The display data creator 806 browses the marketplace Web page, and clicks the icons such as the board surface / spec, game flow, reach action, and notice action shown in FIG. 78 to display the contents of the new variable display device 278. The display data to be displayed on the display 54 is created with reference to the above. When the display data is completed, the “display data registration” icon shown in FIG. 78 is clicked. Then, a determination of YES is made in S855, the control advances to S856, and display data registration acceptance processing is performed. The display data creator 806 clicks the “register display data” icon, specifies the manufacturer name and model name, and transmits the created registration data to the security center server 802. Then, the security center server 802 receives the data and stores it in the database 803.

  Next, in S857, it is determined whether or not there is a desire to purchase display data. If there is no purchase request, the marketplace operation process is terminated. On the other hand, a game hall (a hall) or a player who desires to purchase display data visits the marketplace website, and the “display data list” or “registered display data” shown in FIG. Click on the icon. Then, display data already registered corresponding to the model can be browsed. If the game hall (hall) or the player likes the display data and likes it, the purchase procedure is performed. Then, control proceeds to S858, settlement processing is performed, and display data purchased by the game hall (hall) or the player is distributed to the hall management computer of the game hall (S859). The purchase operation by the player is performed by touching the display 54 and the like, and the operation signal is transmitted from the CU3 → the hall management computer → the security center server 802.

  Next, the entire marketplace system will be described with reference to FIG. A hall management computer in a game hall (hall) 805 in Japan and each personal computer of a plurality of display data creators 806 are connected to a server 802 in a security center 804 via the Internet 807. The game hall (hall) 805 can visit the marketplace website operated by the security center server 802 by operating the hall management computer. Similarly, the display data creator 806 can visit the marketplace website operated by the security center server 802 by operating the personal computer. The database 803 of the security center 804 stores display data (including image data and model-compatible data) transmitted from the gaming machine manufacturer in association with the gaming machine chip information. Image data to be displayed on the display 54 is created by a plurality of types of gaming machine manufacturers for one gaming machine chip information and stored in the database 803. For example, two types of image data of first type image data and second type image data are stored in association with the gaming machine chip information of “DEF”. Then, “in-display” is stored as the model-corresponding data, and it is specified that the size of the display 54 is a medium size.

  In this way, display data from the manufacturer is registered by the security center server 802, and the display data is distributed from the security center server 802 to the CU3, so that security for the system can be ensured.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the marketplace browsing process in the hall management computer. When browsing the marketplace and downloading the display data from the marketplace, the security center server 802 → the hall is not downloaded instead of the security center server 802 → the upper server 801 → CU3 described with reference to FIGS. Management computer → Download via CU3.

  Referring to FIG. 77, in S860, it is determined whether or not to access the marketplace web page. If not accessed, the marketplace browsing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the amusement hall operates the hall management computer to access the marketplace web page, control proceeds to step S861, where control is performed to access the marketplace web page and display the page. . Next, in S862, it is determined whether or not there has been a writing / viewing operation. If there is no writing / viewing operation, the control proceeds to S866. On the other hand, if the “write browsing” icon shown in FIG. 78 is clicked, a determination of YES is made in S862, and the flow advances to S863 to display the writing column. As described above, this writing column is a control for displaying the already written contents and the writing area for writing from now on. Then, if the writing operation is performed by operating the hall management computer, a determination of YES is made in S864, the control proceeds to S865, the written content is transmitted to the security center server 802, and the data is stored in the database 803. Control for storing the written contents is performed (see S854).

  Next, in S866, it is determined whether or not there is a purchase request operation. If there is no purchase request operation, the marketplace browsing process is terminated. In the amusement hall, when the “display data list” or “registered display data” shown in FIG. 78 is clicked and the display data is found by browsing the display data, the display is displayed. To purchase data. Then, YES is determined in S866 and the control advances to S867. Then, the display management data desired to be purchased is specified by operating the hall management computer. For example, the manufacturer name and model name are specified, and data of the manufacturer name and model name is transmitted to the security center server 802. The security center server 802 receives it and performs a settlement process (see S858). In response to this, the hall management computer also performs a settlement process in S868. Specific examples of the settlement processing in S858 and S868 include, for example, a general credit settlement in which a settlement page of a marketplace website is displayed on the screen, and information necessary for settlement such as a credit number is written on the screen. Various things such as payment using money can be considered. In addition to settlement with these monetary values, for example, when a gaming machine purchases a gaming machine, the gaming machine maker gives the gaming machine a point, and the gaming hall uses the point. You may be allowed to settle.

  When the player purchases, the purchase operation is performed by touching the display 54 or the like as described above. Then, the display data downloaded to the hall management computer is transmitted to the CU 3 corresponding to the display 54 operated by the player. The hall management computer receives the card ID of the purchased player from the CU 3, and stores the card ID and display data purchased by the player in association with each other. When the player moves the table, when the player card is inserted into the destination CU3, the card ID of the card is transmitted to the hall management computer and stored in association with the card ID. The displayed display data is sent back to the CU 3 so that the display data purchased by the player can be displayed at the destination. In the CU3 in which the display data purchased by the player is downloaded, when the next player starts playing, the inserted card ID is different from that of the previous player. Display data purchased by the player is not displayed. The display data purchased by the player is downloaded and stored in all CUs 3 instead of the hall management computer, and it is determined whether or not the player is a purchase player by the card ID, and the purchase display is made only for the purchase player. It may be controlled to display the data for use on the display 54.

  Thus, the display data purchased and downloaded by the player is controlled so that the purchased display data is automatically displayed on the display device 54 of the gaming machine in which the player is playing. However, the purchased display data is added and displayed as an effect display menu on the effect type menu display screen (S811 in FIG. 73 (a)), and the player selects the effect display menu. The display data thus purchased may be controlled to be displayed.

  In step S869, the purchased display data is downloaded. In step S870, the downloaded display data is transmitted to the corresponding CU3. The CU 3 that has received it stores the display data in a memory such as an EEPROM of the display control unit 350. As a result, the player designates desired display data from among a plurality of types of display data including the display data downloaded in S869 by operating the touch panel of the display 54, and the display data is displayed by the display 54. Can be displayed.

  Note that, when browsing the marketplace and downloading the display data from the marketplace, the security center server 802 → the upper server 801 shown in FIG. 63, as in the case of downloading the display data created by the gaming machine manufacturer. -> You may make it download by the path | route of CU3. Furthermore, a hall management computer may exist (intervene) as part of the download flow shown in FIG.

  FIG. 78 is a screen view showing a page of the marketplace website. A menu screen is first displayed to visitors who visit the marketplace website. On the menu screen, there are “Select a menu” message and various icons such as “Register new device from manufacturer”, “List of registered models”, “List of display data”, and “Register display data”. Is displayed. “New machine registration from manufacturer” is for registering data such as board surface / spec, game flow, reach action, notice action, etc. of a gaming machine manufacturer when a gaming machine manufacturer manufactures and ships a new gaming machine. is there.

  The “registered model list” is an icon for displaying a list of each manufacturer name and model name of a new machine registered by the gaming machine manufacturer. By clicking the “registered model list” icon, a list of manufacturer names and model names is displayed as shown by the down arrow in FIG. When a model name is clicked in the list, as shown by the right arrow in FIG. 78, new model registration information of the model, for example, board surface / spec, game flow, reach action, notice Various icons for displaying the action are displayed, and icons for writing browsing and registered display data are also displayed.

  Clicking on the “board / spec” icon will display the board image, and for example, the number of winning balls, the probability of winning, the probability of rushing, the number of rounds, the number of winning prizes (variable winning ball device), the number of symbols The type etc. are displayed.

  If you click on the “Game Flow” icon, a rough explanation of the flow of the game will be displayed, and if you click on the “Reach Action” icon, the reach action video displayed on the variable display device 278 will be displayed. If the icon is clicked, a moving image of the notice action displayed on the variable display device 278 is displayed.

  If you click “Write Browsing”, you can view the writing of the request for the image you want to display on the display 54 in the model, and you can newly write the request for the image you want to display on the display 54 It becomes possible.

  If “registered display data” is clicked, display data already registered corresponding to the model is displayed.

  If the “display data list” icon on the menu screen is clicked, a list of display data already registered by the display data creator 806 is displayed.

  If the “display data registration” icon on the menu screen is clicked, display data to be registered in the database 803 can be registered.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the transition of the display screen displayed by the display unit 54. First, referring to FIG. 79 (a), a state in which the fluctuation of the display 54 is stopped is shown. In this state, the symbol “391” is stopped and displayed, and Kishiwada's Danjiri Festival is displayed as a background image. The image data of the Danjiri festival is data created by the display data creator 806 and registered in the database 803, and is downloaded from the database 803 and stored in the CU3.

  Next, as the variable display device 278 starts variable, the display unit 54 also starts variable display. This state is shown in FIG. 79 (b). The left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are scroll-displayed from top to bottom, and the display area becomes translucent as shown by the broken line, so that the background of the Danjiri festival video can be seen through. Then, as the variable display of the variable display device 278 stops, the display 54 also stops changing. The state is shown in FIG. 79 (c), and the display result of winning the lottery “777” is derived and displayed.

  As described above, when the display result of whether or not the winning is displayed with the symbol pattern, it may be controlled to give different types of contents according to the type of the symbol pattern to be stopped. Further, instead of variably displaying the symbols, the variable display may be performed by the action of the character, and whether or not the winning is made according to the final action of the character may be displayed.

  72 to 79 described above is also applied to a slot machine 2S described later. That is, the display 510 is also provided in the slot machine 2S, and the controls in FIGS. 72 to 79 are similarly used for the display control.

  Referring to FIG. 80, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2bS is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 2aS with the left side edge as a swing center. Although not shown in FIG. 80, a CU is connected to the left side of the slot machine 2S in the same manner as the P units.

  In the slot machine 2S, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the CU display control unit 350 in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 5 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7 shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) The MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the start switch 7 is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Yes. Further, a display 510 similar to the display 54 of the P table 2 described above is also provided. The display 510 is display-controlled by the CU 3 by the same control as that shown in FIGS.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 2S, first, as with the P machines, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points are obtained by withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, the points, or the stored medals deposited in the game hall (corresponding to P stored balls). In order to use game points, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 5). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 2 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P base 2 or the S base 2S. .

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the slot machine 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  In other words, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value by using the S units, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, which is displayed on the variable display device Before the result is derived, a predetermining unit that determines whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to be generated, and causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining unit A slot machine including derivation control means for performing control and giving means for giving a game value when the winning occurs is configured.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. This FIG. 81 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 6 described as the configuration of the P units with that for the S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. The description of is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41a, 701, 33, the launch control board 31, and the launch motor 18 of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable that the dollar box display in the case of S units is configured so that a large number of medals are loaded instead of the large number of balls shown in FIG.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the balance of a prepaid card, a medal or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be the target of the dollar box display of FIG.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming the card count. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting the counting is displayed on the P display or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, while it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting a real ball, it can be prevented that it takes too much time to complete counting due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) In the present embodiment, when the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first ball count is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the operation is performed. A number of balls that is larger than the first number of balls is counted according to time. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (12) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game points as the holding points when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  In addition, “processing so as to enable...” Means, for example, a process of recording a score that can be specified on a card inserted in a CU when a card return operation is detected and returning the card It is. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (13) In the present embodiment, (A) the fact that game points of “predetermined points” or more are not stored, game points are not counted even if a counting operation is performed. Is done. In the embodiment, when (B) the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more points can be counted, and a notification to that effect is given. Is done. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (14) In the present embodiment, when the counting operation is performed during the ball firing, the counting operation is invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than the reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation has been detected. In addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27) is 0 (not playing) or not (playing), whether or not a game is being played May be determined. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine and the counting operation during the game is invalidated is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  (15) In FIG. 48, the process proceeds to S483 on condition that no big hit has occurred (NO in S482), but the step of S482 may be deleted and the process may proceed from S481 to S483. That is, regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, when the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  Further, the steps of S486 and S487 may be deleted. That is, in FIG. 48, when the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball is forcibly stopped. It may not be performed.

  (16) Referring to FIG. 6, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (17) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 41 may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls remain, so please return the game ball” or a count button on the screen. The display may be such that 28 is displayed and blinks.

  (18) In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), “control for performing display for prompting counting operation on display” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is done. Here, “prompt for counting operation” is, for example, a message indicating “Please count, because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit”, or simply “Counting operation is required”. There may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (19) In the present embodiment, when a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), if there are no more game points remaining (eg, 250 points), the counting operation is performed. Not activated. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, when the counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (20) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (21) When the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different according to the remaining number of game points, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (22) When counting game balls (game points) and converting points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from a speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (23) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (24) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (25) In FIG. 6 or 81, the game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (26) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be performed on the display 312 in the same manner.

  (27) In CU3, based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side, the stored game ball number is updated. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the upper server 801 (in this case, hall management). Error notification may be performed by the computer or the upper server 801).

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the high level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio sensors 163 and 173 detect radio waves. However, the radio sensors 163 and 173 Inverting amplifiers (inverters) for inverting the signals may be provided in the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 so that the signals are input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 via the inverting amplifiers. By doing so, a high level signal is inputted to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 are not detected, while a low level signal is inputted when the radio wave is detected and the main control board 16 is detected. When the occurrence of abnormality is determined on the payout control board 17 and the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 are illegally pulled out, a low level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 and the same as when detecting the radio wave. In addition, the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 can determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the payout control unit 171 has storage means for storing and holding prize opening information and round number information transmitted from the main control board 161 when the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the information of the added number counter transmitted from the control board 161 is consistent with the prize opening information and round number information stored and held (see FIGS. 65 and 66). This is called “total prize ball number matching determination”. However, instead of storing and holding winning mouth information and round number information, the winning control information and the round number information are transmitted from the main control board 161 together with the information of the addition number counter, and the payout control that receives them is received. The unit 171 may perform control so as to determine whether or not the information of the received addition number counter is consistent with the received prize opening information and round number information. This is referred to as “every time transmission method of winning mouth information and round number information”.

  (30) When the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection or the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection is input to the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17 may be disabled. Specific examples of the deactivation include stopping transmission of the number of additional balls to the CU 3 and stopping the counting operation of the additional ball counter.

  (31) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (32) When the counting operation is executed, the points may be counted up at an accelerated rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting up of the points was started. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of gaming points can be shortened.

  (33) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the coefficient operation means both detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (34) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (35) In S663 of FIG. 66, whether or not there is an abnormality is determined based on whether or not the increment amount (game ball) of the addition number counter at the polling interval is an appropriate value. Then, the information on which winning opening has been won and the information on the number of winning balls added by the winning (number of added balls) are transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, and in the payout control board 17, The presence / absence of an abnormality may be determined based on whether or not the number of prize balls that should be added according to the prize winning slot matches the received prize ball number information (number of balls to be added). This is called an “individual determination method for each winning mouth”.

  Specifically, the payout control board 17 stores winning award information transmitted from the main control board 16. The content is information on the number of prize balls (number of balls to be added) associated with each winning opening (see FIG. 64A). If a winning occurs during the game, the information on which winning opening is won and the information on the number of winning balls (added balls) added by the winning are associated with each other from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. Sent. For example, information such as “winning at the start winning opening 1 and information on the number of winning balls (added ball number) is 5” is sent. The payout control board 17 that has received it refers to the stored prize opening information (FIG. 64 (a)), and stores the prize ball number information (addition balls) stored for the "start prize opening 1". Number) Read “3”. The read prize ball number information (addition ball number) “3” is compared with the received prize ball number information (addition ball number) “5”, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if there is a mismatch.

In other words, the gaming machines (P units, S units) that give predetermined game points by the occurrence of winnings are:
For controlling the progress of the game of the gaming machine and specifying an addition update amount for adding the score corresponding to the type of winning to the gaming point based on the occurrence of winning in any of a plurality of types of winnings Game parts (game board 26, reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels) provided with game control means (P main control boards 16, S main control boards) for generating addition update information;
A game frame configured to be able to attach the game parts (P front frame 6, reels in S units and various sensor parts attached to the reels and configurations other than the main control board for controlling the reels);
The addition update information (the number of added balls, the addition number) provided in the game frame and generated by the game control means is received, the game points are added and updated based on the addition update information, and the game points Game point processing means (payout control board 17) for subtracting and updating the game points based on use in games,
The addition update amount of the game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of the winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has occurred (FIG. 64 (a)),
The game control means stores a predetermined addition update amount as a prescribed addition update amount (winning opening information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16. ), Processing for transmitting the specified addition update amount to the game point processing means (FIG. 63: winning opening information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17),
The game point processing means receives the addition update information, the type of winning that causes the addition update information, and the number of winnings from the game control means, and the prescribed addition updating corresponding to the type of winning Appropriateness determining means for determining whether or not the added update amount is an appropriate size depending on whether or not the product of the number of winnings with respect to the amount matches the added update amount specified by the added update information including.

  Such an “individual determination method for each winning mouth” includes “total winning ball number matching determination” described in the main embodiment, and “the winning mouth information and round number information transmitted every time” described in (29) above. Any of the “method” may be applied.

  (36) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use process includes a process for executing the wagon service, or a process of dividing and sharing the score (the ball) (a process of dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the player selects the image data to be displayed on the display unit 54 by touching the touch panel of the display unit 54. It may be controlled so that the attendant of the game hall operates the hall management computer or the like to select image data to be displayed on the display 54.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, the display data including all the plurality of types of image data is collectively received from the security center server 802 (S804 to S806 in FIG. 72). When image data to be selected is selected, control may be performed so that only the selected image data is received from the security center server 802. Furthermore, display data including all of a plurality of types of image data is collectively received and stored by the in-game server (for example, a hall management server) from the security center server 802 and displayed on the display unit 54. When is selected, the CU 3 may be controlled to receive only the selected image data from a server in the game hall (for example, a hall management server).

  (39) The display data downloaded from the security center server 802 is not limited to the data when the display 54 is variably displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device 278. (Variable winning ball apparatus) Display data to be displayed on the display 54 during the round control for opening the 271 or display during the ball sharing operation (FIGS. 49 to 55) or the wagon service (FIGS. 56 to 62). It may be display data to be displayed on 54.

  (40) The variable display on the display units 54 and 510 is not triggered by the variable display device 278 of the gaming machine or the variable display of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. You may control to perform variable display with an opportunity.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, the variable display history is started by the indicators 54 and 510 when the variable display history satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the variable display count reaches the tenth time). Based on the game history such as the number of occurrences of jackpots, the number of invalid start winnings (starting winnings when the holding storage is full), etc., variable display may be started on the indicators 54 and 510. Also, these histories may be controlled to be cleared when a card is ejected from the CU 3 so that the inconvenience of taking over the previous player's history may be prevented. If the previous card ID matches the current card ID when inserted, the history may be controlled again.

  (42) As a specific example of selecting the type of image data (direction type) created by a gaming machine maker, a mascot character of the gaming machine maker, or a type selected from those using a logo, The image data for each model may be selected from image data corresponding to each of a plurality of characters appearing in the model. That is, the “operation for selecting the type of effect” is a broad concept including an operation for selecting a plurality of types of display objects used for the effect.

  (43) In the above-described embodiment, the display data corresponding to the model of the gaming machine (gaming machine chip information) is created and downloaded (see FIG. 76). Selection and player selection by creating and downloading general-purpose display data (such as Princess Kaguya) that can be used for various models, and storing it in common in CU3 that supports multiple types of game machines regardless of model. It may be controlled to display according to the above. Thus, when a game is played with a certain gaming machine, dedicated display data (multiple) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine (gaming machine chip information) and the like and the above-described versatile display Display data desired by the player can be selected from a plurality of types of display data including data. Furthermore, as a plurality of types of display data, even if the probability of winning as a result of the display is high (for example, 60%), even if the value of the digital content provided is low (for example, equivalent to 10 yen), it is displayed. Including the one with a high value of digital content (e.g., equivalent to 500 yen) given when the probability of winning the result is low (for example, 20%) is won, and accordingly the display control of the winning display result and the digital content It is also possible to perform the giving control.

<Various configurations included in the embodiment>
(1-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game with a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points (game balls, game points) upon occurrence of a prize. ,
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points to the possession points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, the game point is used as the holding point, and a predetermined process (a card is received by a gift exchange machine) is specified by the card. Processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CUs when a card ejected from a CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for processing (processing that makes it possible to identify a ball with a card ID, for example, recording a ball on a card or ID management of a ball with a computer);
And an enabling means (FIG. 41) for enabling the recording medium processing operation when conversion display for all game points stored in the gaming point storage means is completed.

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the display in which the game points obtained by the game are temporarily converted into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

(1-2) The present invention is a game point processing device (CU, P, S) for enabling a game to give predetermined game points (game balls, game points) by the occurrence of a prize. ,
Based on the detection of a conversion operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (holding balls, points), conversion of the game points into the points Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing display;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, the game point is used as the holding point, and a predetermined process (a card is received by a gift exchange machine) is specified by the card. Processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CUs when a card ejected from a CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for processing (processing that makes it possible to identify a ball with a card ID, for example, recording a ball on a card or ID management of a ball with a computer);
And an enabling means (FIG. 41) for enabling the recording medium processing operation when conversion display for all game points is completed.

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the display in which the game points obtained by the game are temporarily converted into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

(1-3) The gaming system according to (1-1),
Conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control unit 171, CU control unit 323) for converting the game points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 6).

  According to the above configuration, since the game points are actually converted into score points and stored as score points in addition to the display, a new system that uses game points in a form that is even closer to the conventional system. Can provide.

(1-4) (1-1) The gaming system according to (1-3),
A gaming device (CU) including the recording medium processing means;
A gaming machine (P units, S units) including the display means,
The gaming device includes display control means (display control unit 350) for controlling display of the display means.

  According to the above configuration, by providing the display means on the game side, it becomes easier for the player facing the gaming machine to see the state of the conversion display, and at the same time, the display control means is provided on the gaming device side to control the display on the gaming machine side. The burden can be reduced.

(1-5) The gaming system according to (1-4),
The gaming machine includes the conversion operation means (count buttons 28, 28S).

  According to said structure, the operativity of the player facing a game machine can be improved by providing a conversion operation means in the game side.

(1-6) (1-1) (1-3) (1-4) The gaming system according to (1-5),
When the recording medium processing operation is detected when conversion display for all game points is not performed by the display means, the display means displays a display (FIG. 41) prompting the operation of the conversion operation means.

  According to the above configuration, the display prompting the operation of the conversion operation means is performed, so that the player can be informed of the reason why the recording medium processing operation has not been validated.

(1-7) (1-4) The gaming system according to (1-5),
The gaming machine includes the gaming point storage means (game ball number counter of FIG. 6, game point counter of FIG. 81),
The gaming apparatus includes a point storage means (the area of card holding balls (counting balls) in FIG. 6) for storing the points.

  According to the above configuration, the management of game points and points can be shared between the gaming machine and the gaming device, and the management burden of each can be reduced.

(1-8) (1-1) The gaming system according to (1-3) to (1-7),
The recording medium processing means includes
A score processing means for performing score processing for enabling the score stored in the score storage means to be specified by the recording information of the recording medium (the CU control unit 323 records the score on the card, or the card ID and score are sent to the server for storage)
Return processing means (the CU control unit 323 ejects the card) for returning the recording medium to the player after the holding point processing is performed.

  According to the above configuration, since the score process and the return process of the recording medium are performed together by the recording medium processing operation, the player's operation when ending the game becomes easy.

(2-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game with a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points (game balls, game points) upon occurrence of a prize. ,
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points to the possession points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
Notification control for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for a counting operation on a display) when the number of game points stored in the game point storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more). Means (S489 in FIG. 48).

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. In addition, if the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, predetermined notification control is performed, which makes it possible to simulate a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full, Can provide a system that is familiar to players who are used to the system.

(2-2) The present invention is a game point processing device (CU, P, S) for enabling a game to give predetermined game points (game balls, game points) by the occurrence of winnings. ,
Based on the detection of a conversion operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (holding balls, points), conversion of the game points into the points Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing display;
48. Notification control means (S489 in FIG. 48) for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for counting operation on the display) when the number of game points is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more). Including.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. In addition, if the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, predetermined notification control is performed, which makes it possible to simulate a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full, Can provide a system that is familiar to players who are used to the system.

(2-3) The gaming system according to (2-1),
The notification control means is means for controlling the display means (display control unit 350), and when the game points stored in the game point storage means are equal to or greater than the predetermined number of points, the operation of the conversion operation means Is displayed on the display means (FIG. 48).

  According to the above configuration, since the display prompting the conversion operation is performed, it is easy for the player to understand the meaning of the notification.

(2-4) (2-1) The gaming system according to (2-3),
48. Disabling means (S486 in FIG. 48; launch stop) for controlling the gaming machine to a non-gameable state when the game points stored in the game point storage means are equal to or greater than the predetermined number of points.

  According to the above configuration, if the number of game points is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game is disabled, so that a conversion operation can be prompted.

(3-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game with a gaming machine (P units, S units) that gives predetermined game points (game balls, game points) upon occurrence of a prize. ,
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points to the possession points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), game points of a predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) are stored in the game point storage means. On the condition, the enabling means (FIG. 44) which validates operation of the said conversion operation means is included.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. Moreover, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are more game points than the predetermined number of points, so that there are few game points left by the conversion operation. The game continues even though the conversion display timing overlaps with the timing at which the remaining few game points are consumed due to the continuation of the game, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(3-2) The present invention is a game point processing device (CU, P, S) for enabling a game to give a predetermined game point (game ball, game point) by the occurrence of a prize. ,
Based on the detection of a conversion operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (holding balls, points), conversion of the game points into the points Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing display;
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition And validating means for validating the conversion operation (FIG. 44).

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. Moreover, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are more game points than the predetermined number of points, so that there are few game points left by the conversion operation. The game continues even though the conversion display timing overlaps with the timing at which the remaining few game points are consumed due to the continuation of the game, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(3-3) The gaming system according to (3-1),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points, and the operation of the conversion operation means is detected in a state where the game point storage means does not store more than the predetermined number of game points. , Including notification control means for performing first notification control (control for displaying on the display that the counting operation has been invalidated because the game is in progress and the number of game balls is 250 or less).

  According to the above configuration, the conversion operation is not effective for the player because the first notification control is performed when the conversion operation is performed in a state where a predetermined number of game points remain during execution of the game using the game points. Can be understood.

(3-4) (3-1) The gaming system according to (3-3),
Conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control unit 171) that performs conversion processing for converting the game points stored in the game point storage means into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means. CU control unit 323),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (counting ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 6);
When the conversion processing means detects an operation of the conversion operation means when a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points, the game points stored in the game point storage means The conversion process is performed until the predetermined number of points is reached (FIG. 44),
When the conversion process is performed until the gaming point stored in the gaming point storage unit reaches the predetermined number of points, the notification control unit disables second notification control (counting operation is invalidated halfway). Control to display this).

  According to the above configuration, since the second notification control is performed when the conversion operation is performed during the execution of the game using the game points and the game points reach a predetermined number of points that are not further converted, the second notification control is performed. The player can understand that the game points are not converted.

(4-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game by a gaming machine (P, S) that gives predetermined game points (game balls, game points) by occurrence of a winning. ,
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control unit 171, CU control unit 323) for converting the game points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 6);
A point use operation means (touch panel; FIG. 49, etc.) for executing predetermined point use processing (wagon service, point sharing) using the points;
On the basis of the detected operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the number of points required for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 45, FIG. 46) and
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 45, Fig. 46; "Please press the count button due to lack of balls" ”And a notification control means (display control unit 350) for performing display on the display).

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. In addition, it is possible to execute the score use processing in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, a predetermined notification control is performed. It is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the points use processing.

(4-2) The present invention is a game point processing device (CU, P units, S units) for enabling a game in which predetermined game points (game balls, game points) are given by the occurrence of winnings. ,
Based on the detection of a conversion operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (held balls, points), the game points are converted into the points. Conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control unit 171, CU control unit 323),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 6);
A point use operation means (touch panel; FIG. 49, etc.) for executing predetermined point use processing (wagon service, point sharing) using the points;
On the basis of the detected operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the number of points required for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 45, FIG. 46) and
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 45, Fig. 46; "Please press the count button due to lack of balls" ”And a notification control means (display control unit 350) for performing display on the display).

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. In addition, it is possible to execute the score use processing in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number of points necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. It is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(4-3) The gaming system according to (4-1),
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, the game point is used as the holding point, and a predetermined process (a card is received by a gift exchange machine) is specified by the card. Processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CUs when a card ejected from a CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used) It includes a recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) that performs processing (processing that makes it possible to identify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or ID management of the ball using a computer).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the display in which the game points obtained by the game are temporarily converted into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

(4-4) The gaming system according to (4-3),
A gaming device (CU) including the recording medium processing means;
A gaming machine (P units, S units) provided with display means (displays 54, 510) for performing conversion display of the gaming points to the holding points based on detection of the operation of the conversion operation means. Including
The gaming device includes display control means (display control unit 350) for controlling display of the display means.

  According to the above configuration, by providing the display means on the game side, it becomes easier for the player facing the gaming machine to see the state of the conversion display, and at the same time, the display control means is provided on the gaming device side to control the display on the gaming machine side. The burden can be reduced.

(4-5) The gaming system according to (4-4),
The gaming machine includes the conversion operation means (count buttons 28, 28S).

  According to said structure, the operativity of the player facing a game machine can be improved by providing a conversion operation means in the game side.

(4-6) (4-4) The gaming system according to (4-5),
The gaming machine includes the gaming point storage means (game ball number counter of FIG. 6, game point counter of FIG. 81),
The gaming apparatus includes the holding point storage means (the area of card holding balls (counting balls) in FIG. 6).

  According to the above configuration, the management of game points and points can be shared between the gaming machine and the gaming device, and the management burden of each can be reduced.

(4-7) The gaming system according to (4-3) to (4-6),
The recording medium processing means includes
A score processing means (a CU control unit 323 scores points on a card) for performing a score process so that the game points stored in the game point storage means can be specified by the recorded information of the recording medium as the score. Or send the card ID and points to the server for storage)
Return processing means (the CU control unit 323 ejects the card) for returning the recording medium to the player after the holding point processing is performed.

  According to the above configuration, since the score process and the return process of the recording medium are performed together by the recording medium processing operation, the player's operation when ending the game becomes easy.

(5-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game by a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points (game balls, game points) upon occurrence of a prize. ,
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points to the possession points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
A total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 70) for converting and displaying all the game points stored in the game point storage unit into the holding points in response to an operation on the conversion operation unit, and the game points A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 70) for converting and displaying a part of the game points stored in the storage means to the holding points can be executed.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. In addition, since all conversion operations and partial conversion operations of game points are possible, game points can be obtained in a manner that is closer to that of a conventional game system that allows partial counting of game media obtained by games. A new system can be provided.

(5-2) The present invention is a game point processing device (CU, P units, S units) for enabling a game in which predetermined game points (game balls, game points) are given by the occurrence of winnings. ,
A conversion operation means for converting the game points into predetermined points (holding balls, points);
Display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points to the possession points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
In accordance with an operation on the conversion operation means, a total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 70) for converting and displaying all game points into the points, and a part of the game points as points. A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 70) for conversion display can be executed.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. In addition, since all conversion operations and partial conversion operations of game points are possible, game points can be obtained in a manner that is closer to that of a conventional game system that allows partial counting of game media obtained by games. A new system can be provided.

(5-3) The gaming system according to (5-1),
The display means changes the number of game points to be converted and displayed to the holding points by one operation of the conversion operation means according to the continuous operation time for which the conversion operation means is continuously operated (100 balls for short press). , More than 400 balls in long press).

  According to the above configuration, since the number of game points to be converted and displayed by one operation of the conversion operation means differs according to the continuous operation time during which the conversion operation means continues to be operated, the game for operating the conversion operation means Convenience can be improved.

(5-4) The gaming system according to (5-1),
The display means changes the number of game points to be converted and displayed to the holding points by one operation of the conversion operation means according to the number of game points stored in the game point storage means (FIG. 69). S694 to S696).

  According to the above configuration, since the number of game points to be converted and displayed by one operation of the conversion operation means differs according to the number of game points stored in the game point storage means, the game points are compared. Even if the number of game points is large, the number of operations of the conversion operation means necessary for converting and displaying all the game points is not extremely increased, thereby improving operability.

(5-5) The gaming system according to (5-1),
The display means converts and displays a predetermined number of the game points to the holding points by one operation of the conversion operation means (100 balls for short press (FIG. 41), a predetermined number of 100 balls or more for long press, For example, it may be 200 or 400.)

  According to the above configuration, a predetermined number of game points are converted and displayed by one operation of the conversion operation means, so that the player can easily understand the relationship between the conversion operation and the conversion display target game points. .

(5-6) The gaming system according to (5-1),
The conversion operation means includes a first conversion operation means capable of performing an operation for converting and displaying game points having a first size score to the holding points, and game points having a second size score as the game points. And a second conversion operation means capable of performing an operation for conversion to a holding point (FIG. 70).

  According to the above configuration, the player can select the number of game points to be converted and displayed in one operation by selectively operating the first and second conversion operation means.

(6-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game with a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points (game balls, game points) upon occurrence of a prize. ,
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control unit 171, CU control unit 323) for converting the game points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 6);
Use of the point use operation means (replay button 319) for receiving a predetermined service using the point;
Notification control means (display control unit 350, FIG. 45, FIG. 46, FIG. 49 to FIG. 62) for performing control to notify the service that the player can receive using the points;
On the basis of the detected operation of the point use operation means, point deduction means for deducting the number of points necessary for the service from the points stored in the point storage means (see FIG. After paying out, the sharing process is completed ", and Fig. 46" After paying the points, the wagon service is finished ")
The notification control means may be a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. The player is controlled so as not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (displaying as a service that can be received by the player by displaying a cross as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58) (Alternatively, menus that cannot be purchased even if the number of balls including game balls and game balls is added may be controlled so as not to be displayed.)

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. Further, when the player receives a predetermined service using the points stored in the point storage means, a service that can be received by the player using the points is notified, and the player Recognize services that can be received. In addition, when the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for a predetermined service, even if the game points are stored in the game point storage means, the player receives Since the control for notifying the predetermined service as a service that can be performed is not performed, there is a disadvantage that the player is misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of the points stored in the point storage means. Can be prevented.

  (6-2) In the gaming system of (6-1), the notification control means can control to notify a plurality of types of services having different necessary points (FIGS. 50, 57, and 58). ), A service within a score point where the required score point is stored in the score point storage means (menu surrounded by a solid line in FIGS. 57 and 58) and a required score point are stored in the score point storage means. The required points are within the updated points by converting the game points that exceed the existing points but can be converted by the operation of the conversion operation means into the points and adding and updating the points. Control is performed to distinguish and notify the services that can be performed (menus enclosed by broken lines in FIGS. 57 and 58).

  According to such a configuration, the player can receive a service that can be received within the score stored in the score storage means, and the score stored in the score storage means, among a plurality of types of services. However, it is possible to distinguish and recognize services that can be received by converting game points into points and adding and updating points. The convenience of the player when receiving the service is improved.

  (6-3) In the gaming system according to (6-1) or (6-2), the notification control unit can control to notify a plurality of types of services having different necessary points (FIG. 50). 57, FIG. 58), a service in which the required points exceed the updated points even if all the game points that can be converted by the operation of the conversion operation means are converted into the points and added (A menu that cannot be purchased even with the number of balls including a game ball and game balls may be controlled so as not to be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, even if all the game points are converted into points and added and updated, control for notifying a service in which the required points exceed the points after the update is not performed. The misunderstanding of the player that it can be received can be prevented.

  (6-4) In the gaming system according to (6-1) or (6-2), the notification control unit can control to notify a plurality of types of services having different necessary points (FIG. 50). 57, FIG. 58), a service in which the required points exceed the updated points even if all the game points that can be converted by the operation of the conversion operation means are converted into the points and added Performs control to notify that the service cannot be received by the player (displays that the service cannot be received by the player by displaying a cross as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58).

  According to the above configuration, even if all the game points are converted into points and added and updated, the service in which the required points exceed the updated points is notified as a service that the player cannot receive. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that such services can be received.

  (6-5) In the gaming system according to any one of (6-1) to (6-4) above, the notification control unit is configured to obtain a score in which a required score is stored in the score storage unit. A service is selected that allows the required points to be within the updated points by converting the game points that can be converted by the operation of the conversion operation means into the points and adding and updating them. When this is done, notification control is performed to urge the operation of the conversion processing means (“There are not enough balls. Press the counting button to replenish the balls”).

  According to the above configuration, the selected service exceeds the score stored in the score storage means, but the game score is converted into a score to be added and updated within the updated score range. When it is a service that can be provided, notification control that prompts the operation of the conversion processing means is performed, so that the player can perform the conversion operation according to the notification and receive the service, and the convenience of the player Improves.

  (6-6) In the gaming system according to (6-5), the notification control means reduces the game points while performing notification control for prompting the operation of the conversion operation means, and stores the holding points. If it is not possible to update the score stored in the means to the required score, control is performed to notify that the service cannot be selected (see FIG. 51, 59 “There are not enough balls. If the number of gaming balls decreases while the display of “Please press and replenish the holding balls” is displayed and the number of holding balls cannot be updated to the required number of holding balls, the display control unit 350 displays “ "The service cannot be selected because the number of balls has decreased."

  According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that the service cannot be selected despite the notification that prompts the user to operate the conversion operation means.

  (6-7) In the gaming system of (6-1) to (6-6) above, when a game is being played by the gaming machine using the gaming points, a predetermined number of points are stored in the gaming point storage means. On the condition that the above game points are stored, it further includes an enabling means (S691 to S698 in FIG. 69) for enabling the operation of the conversion operating means.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing at which the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing at which the remaining few game points are consumed due to the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted into points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the game is continued without being generated.

(6-8) Another aspect of the present invention is to connect to a gaming machine (P units, S units) provided with game point storage means for storing a predetermined game point given by the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (CU) for enabling a game in the gaming machine, comprising a connecting portion (connector) of
Conversion processing means for providing a service for converting the gaming points into the holding points based on the detection of the conversion operation (the pressing operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined holding points. (FIG. 41, payout control unit 171, CU control unit 323),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 6);
Notification control means (display control unit 350, FIG. 45, FIG. 46, FIG. 49 to FIG. 62) for performing control to notify the service that the player can receive using the points;
Based on the detection of a point use operation for receiving a predetermined service using the points, the points necessary for the service are deducted from the points stored in the point storage means. 45 points deduction means ("money ball sharing process ends after paying points", Fig. 46 "wagon service ends after paying points"),
The notification control means may be a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. The player is controlled so as not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (displaying as a service that can be received by the player by displaying a cross as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58) (Alternatively, menus that cannot be purchased even if the number of balls including game balls and game balls is added may be controlled so as not to be displayed.)

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points can be provided without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system for counting game media obtained by games. Further, when the player receives a predetermined service using the points stored in the point storage means, a service that can be received by the player using the points is notified, and the player Recognize services that can be received. In addition, when the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for a predetermined service, even if the game points are stored in the game point storage means, the player receives Since the control for notifying the predetermined service as a service that can be performed is not performed, there is a disadvantage that the player is misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of the points stored in the point storage means. Can be prevented.

  (6-9) In the gaming apparatus according to (6-8), the notification control means can control to notify a plurality of types of services having different necessary points (FIGS. 50, 57, and 58). ), A service within a score point where the required score point is stored in the score point storage means (menu surrounded by a solid line in FIGS. 57 and 58) and a required score point are stored in the score point storage means. The necessary points may be within the updated points by converting the game points that exceed the existing points but can be converted by the conversion operation into the points and adding and updating the points. Control is performed to distinguish and notify possible services (menus surrounded by broken lines in FIGS. 57 and 58).

  According to the above configuration, the player can receive a service that can be received within the score stored in the score storage means, and the score stored in the score storage means, from among a plurality of types of services. However, the service that can be received by converting the game points into points and adding and updating the points can be recognized separately, and the convenience of the player when receiving the services is improved.

  (6-10) In the gaming apparatus according to (6-8) or (6-9), the notification control means can control to notify a plurality of types of services having different necessary points (FIG. 50). , FIG. 57, FIG. 58), even if all the game points that can be converted by the conversion operation are converted into the points and added and updated, the service in which the required points exceed the updated points will not be notified. (Menus that cannot be purchased even with the number of balls including game balls and game balls may be controlled so as not to be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, even if all the game points are converted into points and added and updated, control for notifying a service in which the required points exceed the points after the update is not performed. The misunderstanding of the player that it can be received can be prevented.

  (6-11) In the gaming device according to (6-8) or (6-9), the notification control means can control to notify a plurality of types of services having different necessary points (FIG. 50). 57, 58), even if all the game points that can be converted by the conversion operation are converted to the points and added, the required points exceed the updated points. Is controlled as a service that cannot be received (displays that the service cannot be received by the player by displaying a cross as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58).

  According to the above configuration, even if all the game points are converted into points and added and updated, the service in which the required points exceed the updated points is notified as a service that the player cannot receive. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that such a service can be received.

  (6-12) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (6-8) to (6-11) above, the notification control unit determines a score in which a required score is stored in the score storage unit. A service has been selected that allows the required points to be within the updated points by converting all of the game points that can be converted by the conversion operation to the points and adding and updating them. In some cases, notification control that prompts the operation of the conversion processing means is performed ("There are not enough balls. Press the counting button to replenish the balls").

  According to the above configuration, the selected service exceeds the score stored in the score storage means, but the game score is converted into a score to be added and updated within the updated score range. When it is a service that can be provided, notification control that prompts the operation of the conversion processing means is performed, so that the player can perform the conversion operation according to the notification and receive the service, and the convenience of the player Improves.

  (6-13) In the gaming machine according to (6-12), the notification control means decreases the number of game points stored during the notification control for prompting the conversion operation and stores it in the holding point storage means. If it is not possible to update the score to the required score, control is performed to notify that the service cannot be selected (see FIG. 51 and 59, “There are not enough balls. If the number of game balls decreases while the display of “please replenish balls” is performed and the number of balls cannot be updated to the required number of balls, the display control unit 350 displays “the number of game balls is "The service cannot be selected because it has decreased."

  According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that the service cannot be selected despite the notification that prompts the user to operate the conversion operation means.

  (6-14) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (6-8) to (6-13), when the game is performed by the gaming machine using the gaming point, the conversion processing means is The conversion process when the conversion operation is detected is performed on the condition that a predetermined number of game points are stored in the game point storage means (S691 to S698 in FIG. 69).

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing at which the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing at which the remaining few game points are consumed due to the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted into points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the game is continued without being generated.

(7-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points by the occurrence of a prize,
Game parts (game board 26, reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels) provided with game control means (P main control board 16, S main control board) for controlling the progress of the game of the gaming machine; ,
A game frame configured to selectively attach different types of game components (P front frame 6, reels in S units, various sensor parts attached to the reels, and configurations other than the main control board for controlling the reels) When,
Provided on the game frame side, receives addition update information (the number of added balls, the number of additions) output from the game control means when a winning occurs, and adds and updates the game points based on the addition update information Game point processing means (payout control board 17) for subtracting and updating the game points based on the use of the game points for games;
A sensor (radio wave sensor 173) is provided on the game frame side and detects electromagnetic waves.

  According to the above configuration, since the sensor for detecting the radio wave sensor is provided on the game frame side provided with the game point processing means, it is possible to cope with illegal acts due to electromagnetic waves on the game machine frame side. It becomes.

  (7-2) In the gaming machine of (7-1), the gaming point processing means is disabled by removing the sensor (game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection is detected on the payout control board 17). When an input is made, the payout control board 17 may be disabled (for example, the transmission of the number of additional balls to the CU 3 may be stopped, or the counting operation of the additional ball counter may be stopped).

  According to the above configuration, since the game point processing means is disabled by removing the sensor, it is possible to cope with an illegal act of removing the sensor.

(7-3) In the gaming machine of (7-1) or (7-2) above, an input unit for inputting the detection signal of the electromagnetic wave sensor (input port to the payout control board 17 of the radio wave sensor 173 in FIG. 5) And an abnormality control means (S714, S715) for performing the abnormality control when the detection signal is input,
When the sensor is removed, it becomes the same input state as the detection signal of the sensor (the inverting amplifier (inverter) for inverting the signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is provided in the radio wave sensor 173 and the signal is passed through the inverting amplifier) Is input to the payout control board 17, a high level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio wave sensor 173 is not detected, while a low level signal is input when the radio wave is detected. When the abnormality is detected by the payout control board 17 being input and the radio wave sensor 173 is illegally pulled out, a low level signal is input to the payout control board 17 and the payout control board 17 is the same as when the radio wave is detected. Determines the occurrence of abnormality).

  According to the above configuration, when the sensor is removed, the input state is the same as the detection signal of the sensor, and the abnormal time control means executes the abnormal time control. It is possible to deal with fraud.

(7-4) In another aspect of the present invention, game control means (P main control board 16 and S main control board) for controlling the progress of the game by the gaming machines (P, S) is provided. A game frame (P front frame 6, reels in the S units and various sensor units and reels attached to the reels) configured to be attached to the game parts (the game board 26, the reels and various sensor units attached to the reels) Other than the main control board for controlling
It receives addition update information (the number of balls to be added, the number of additions) output from the game control means based on a winning prize, adds and updates game points based on the received addition update information, and the game points are added to the game. Game point processing means (payout control board 17) for subtracting and updating the game points by being used;
And a sensor (radio wave sensor 173) for detecting electromagnetic waves.

  According to the above configuration, since the sensor for detecting the radio wave sensor is provided on the game frame side provided with the game point processing means, it is possible to cope with illegal acts due to electromagnetic waves on the game machine frame side. It becomes.

  (7-5) In the game frame of (7-4), the game point processing means is disabled by removing the sensor (game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection is detected on the payout control board 17). When an input is made, the payout control board 17 may be disabled (for example, the transmission of the number of additional balls to the CU 3 may be stopped, or the counting operation of the additional ball counter may be stopped).

  According to the above configuration, since the game point processing means is disabled by removing the sensor, it is possible to cope with an illegal act of removing the sensor.

(7-6) In the game frame of (7-4) or (7-5) above, an input unit for inputting the detection signal of the electromagnetic wave sensor (input port to the payout control board 17 of the radio wave sensor 173 in FIG. 5) Further comprising an abnormality control means for performing an abnormality control when a detection signal is input,
When the sensor is removed, the input state is the same as the detection signal of the sensor.

  According to the above configuration, when the sensor is removed, the input state is the same as the detection signal of the sensor, and the abnormal time control means executes the abnormal time control. It is possible to cope with fraudulent activity (an inverting amplifier (inverter) for inverting the signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is provided in the radio wave sensor 173, and the signal is input to the dispensing control board 17 via the inverting amplifier). With this configuration, when the radio wave sensor 173 is not detected, a high level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17, while when a radio wave is detected, a low level signal is input to the payout control board 17. If the occurrence of abnormality is determined and the radio wave sensor 173 is pulled out illegally, a low level signal is input to the payout control board 17 and the payment is performed in the same manner as when radio wave is detected. Control board 17 and determines abnormality).

  According to the above configuration, when the sensor is removed, the input state is the same as the detection signal of the sensor, and the abnormal time control means executes the abnormal time control. It is possible to deal with fraud.

(7-7) Still another aspect of the present invention is a game component (game board 26, reel and various sensor parts attached to the reel) attached to the game frame,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game by the gaming machine and generating addition update information (the number of balls to be added and the number of additions) for specifying an addition update amount to be added to a predetermined game point based on the occurrence of a prize ( P main control boards 16 and S main control boards),
Transmitting means for transmitting the added update information to the game point processing means (payout control board 17) provided on the game frame side provided with a sensor for detecting electromagnetic waves and adding / subtracting game points (FIG. 5). 6 addition ball number transmission, FIG. 81 addition number transmission, FIG. 43).

  According to the above configuration, since the sensor for detecting the radio wave sensor is provided on the gaming frame side by attaching the gaming component to the gaming frame, Can also be dealt with.

(8-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points by the occurrence of a prize,
Game control means (P main control boards 16 and S for generating addition update information for controlling the progress of the game of the gaming machine and specifying the addition update amount to be added to the game points based on the occurrence of a prize. A game part provided with a main control board) (game board 26, reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels);
A game frame configured to be able to attach the game parts (P front frame 6, reels in S units and various sensor parts attached to the reels and configurations other than the main control board for controlling the reels);
The addition update information (the number of added balls, the addition number) provided in the game frame and generated by the game control means is received, the game points are added and updated based on the addition update information, and the game points Game point processing means (payout control board 17) for subtracting and updating the game points based on use in games,
The addition update amount of the game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of the winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has occurred (FIG. 64 (a)),
The game control means stores a predetermined addition update amount as a prescribed addition update amount (winning opening information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16. ), Processing for transmitting the specified addition update amount to the game point processing means (FIG. 63: winning opening information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17),
The game point processing means determines whether or not the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is an appropriate size based on the specified addition update amount. Means (S663).

  According to the above configuration, the amount of game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of a winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has been generated, and the game control means can determine the predetermined addition. The update amount is stored as the specified addition update amount, and the processing for transmitting the specified addition update amount to the game point processing means is performed, and the game point processing means receiving the update amount information is added update information transmitted from the game control means. It is determined based on the prescribed addition update amount whether or not the addition update amount specified by is an appropriate size. Originally, the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means based on the occurrence of the winning is consistent with the prescribed addition update amount, but the addition transmitted from the game control means If the update information itself is fraudulent, the consistency between the two cannot be achieved, and the suitability determination means determines that the size is not appropriate, and it is possible to deal with fraud.

(8-2) In the gaming machine of (8-1) above, the gaming control means transmits a specified addition update amount when the gaming machine is turned on (S651),
The game point processing means stores and holds storage means information (main control chip ID, winning mouth information, round number information) in S657 for storing the specified addition update amount transmitted from the game control means. Storage medium)
The suitability determining means determines whether or not the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is an appropriate amount, to the specified addition update amount stored in the storage means. Based on the determination (S663).

  According to the above configuration, the specified addition update amount transmitted at the time of power-on is stored on the game point processing means side, and thereafter, the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is appropriate. In order to determine whether or not the size is based on the stored prescribed addition update amount, the game control means does not need to send the prescribed addition update amount each time the addition update amount is transmitted, The control burden on the game control means can be reduced.

(8-3) In the gaming machine of (8-2), the game control means also transmits game control means identification information for identifying the game control means to the game point processing means when the gaming machine is powered on. (S651),
The storage means also stores the game control means identification information transmitted from the game control means (also stores the main control chip ID in S657),
The suitability judging means collates the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount transmitted from the game control means with the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount stored in the storage means. Then, when the game control means identification information matches but the prescribed addition update amount does not match, an abnormality determination is made (YES in S654 and fraud detection information is sent in S658 when NO in S655).

  According to said structure, a memory | storage means memorize | stores the game control means identification information transmitted from the game control means. Then, the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount transmitted from the game control means are compared with the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount stored in the storage means, and the game control means identification information is An abnormality is determined when they match but the specified addition update amount does not match. As a result, when the game parts are exchanged together with the game control means and a new game part is attached to the game frame, it is determined that the game control means identification information does not match, but the game control means identification information matches. When such exchange has not been performed and the specified addition update amount transmitted from the same game control means does not match the stored additional addition update amount, the specification transmitted to the game point processing means Since it is assumed that the addition update amount itself has been fraudulent and an abnormality determination is made in such a case, it is possible to cope with fraudulent acts with respect to the specified addition update amount itself.

(8-4) In the gaming machine of the above (8-2) or (8-3), the game control means continues the high winning state in which the winning probability is improved by satisfying a predetermined gaming condition a plurality of times. Control to a specific gaming state to be controlled (the variable winning ball apparatus 271 is controlled to open and close 15 rounds by the occurrence of a jackpot),
The number of continuations of the high winning state in the specific gaming state is predetermined (15 times in FIG. 64 (b)),
The game control means stores the predetermined number of consecutive high winning states as a predetermined number of times (the winning slot information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16). (Stored), when the gaming machine is turned on, the specified number of times of continuous transmission is transmitted to the gaming point processing means (S651),
The storage means stores the prescribed number of continuous times transmitted from the game control means (stores and holds round number information in S657),
The suitability determination means determines whether or not the received increase state of the added update amount is consistent with the prescribed number of continuous times stored in the storage means (transmitted from the main control board 161 during the game) The information of the addition number counter is compared with the stored round number information to determine whether or not it is consistent, and the number of rounds that is a big hit is when the addition number transmitted from the main control board 161 is up (If it continues for more than 15 times, it is judged as abnormal).

  According to said structure, the memory | storage means also memorize | stores the regular continuation number transmitted from the game control means. Then, the high winning state is continued for the prescribed number of times of continuous, and the addition update amount is generally increased during that period. Then, the suitability determining means increases the added update amount exceeding the specified number of times of continuation in order to determine whether or not the increase state of the received added update amount is consistent with the specified number of continuations stored in the storage means An inconsistent state such as a state can be determined abnormally.

(8-5) According to another aspect of the present invention, addition update information for controlling the progress of a game by a gaming machine and specifying an addition update amount to be added to a game point based on the occurrence of a prize (the number of added balls, Game parts (game board 26, reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels) equipped with game control means (P main control boards 16, S main control boards) for generating (addition number) can be attached. A configured game frame (P front frame 6, reels in S units, various sensor parts attached to the reels, and configuration other than the main control board for controlling the reels),
The addition update information (the number of added balls, the addition number) generated by the game control means is received, the game points are added and updated based on the addition update information, and the game points are used for the game. Game point processing means (payout control board 17) for subtracting and updating the game points;
The addition update amount of the game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of the winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has occurred (FIG. 64 (a)),
The game point processing means determines whether or not the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is an appropriate size based on the specified addition update amount. Means (S663).

  According to the above configuration, the amount of game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of a winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has been generated, and the predetermined amount of added updating is specified and added. The game point processing means that has received the specified addition update information transmitted from the game control means stored as the update amount has an appropriate amount of addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means. Is determined based on the prescribed addition update amount. Originally, the addition update information transmitted from the game control means based on the occurrence of the winning is consistent with the prescribed addition update amount, but the addition update information itself transmitted from the game control means is illegal. In such a case, the consistency between the two cannot be obtained, and it is possible to determine that the suitability determination means is not of an appropriate size, and to deal with fraud.

(8-6) In the game frame of (8-5), the game point processing means receives the specified addition update amount transmitted from the game control means when the gaming machine is turned on (S651),
The game point processing means stores the prescribed addition update amount transmitted from the game control means that stores the predetermined addition update amount as a prescribed addition update amount (game board information (S657) A storage medium for storing and holding the main control chip ID, winning mouth information, round number information),
The suitability determining means determines whether or not the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is an appropriate amount, to the specified addition update amount stored in the storage means. Based on the determination (S663).

  According to the above configuration, the specified addition update amount transmitted at the time of power-on is stored on the game point processing means side, and thereafter, the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is appropriate. In order to determine whether or not the size is based on the stored prescribed addition update amount, the game control means does not need to send the prescribed addition update amount each time the addition update amount is transmitted, The control burden on the game control means can be reduced.

(8-7) In the game frame of (8-6), the game point processing means also receives game control means identification information for identifying the game control means from the game control means when the gaming machine is powered on. Received (S651),
The storage means also stores the game control means identification information transmitted from the game control means (also stores the main control chip ID in S657),
The suitability judging means collates the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount transmitted from the game control means with the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount stored in the storage means. Then, when the game control means identification information matches but the prescribed addition update amount does not match, an abnormality determination is made (YES in S654 and fraud detection information is sent in S658 when NO in S655).

  According to said structure, a memory | storage means memorize | stores the game control means identification information transmitted from the game control means. Then, the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount transmitted from the game control means are compared with the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount stored in the storage means, and the game control means identification information is An abnormality is determined when they match but the specified addition update amount does not match. As a result, when the game parts are exchanged together with the game control means and a new game part is attached to the game frame, it is determined that the game control means identification information does not match, but the game control means identification information matches. When such exchange has not been performed and the specified addition update amount transmitted from the same game control means does not match the stored additional addition update amount, the specification transmitted to the game point processing means Since it is assumed that the addition update amount itself has been fraudulent and an abnormality determination is made in such a case, it is possible to cope with fraudulent acts with respect to the specified addition update amount itself.

(8-8) In the gaming frame of (8-6) or (8-7) above, in the specific gaming state in which a high winning state in which a winning occurrence probability is improved by satisfying a predetermined gaming condition is continued a plurality of times. The number of continuations of the high winning state is predetermined (15 times in FIG. 64 (b)),
The storage means stores the prescribed continuation number transmitted from the game control means that stores the predetermined number of continuations of the high winning state as the prescribed continuation number when the gaming machine is turned on (S657). To store the number of rounds information)
The suitability determination means determines whether or not the received increase state of the added update amount is consistent with the prescribed number of continuous times stored in the storage means (transmitted from the main control board 161 during the game) The information of the addition number counter is compared with the stored round number information to determine whether or not it is consistent, and the number of rounds that is a big hit is when the addition number transmitted from the main control board 161 is up (If it continues for more than 15 times, it is judged as abnormal).

  According to said structure, the memory | storage means also memorize | stores the regular continuation number transmitted from the game control means. Then, the high winning state is continued for the prescribed number of times of continuous, and the addition update amount is generally increased during that period. Then, the suitability determining means increases the added update amount exceeding the specified number of times of continuation in order to determine whether or not the increase state of the received added update amount is consistent with the specified number of continuations stored in the storage means An inconsistent state such as a state can be determined abnormally.

(8-9) Still another aspect of the present invention is a gaming component (game board 26, reel and various sensor parts attached to the reel) attached to the game frame,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game by the gaming machine and generating addition update information for specifying an addition update amount to be added to a predetermined game point based on the occurrence of a prize (P main control boards 16, P S main control boards)
The addition update amount of the game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of the winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has occurred (FIG. 64 (a)),
The game control means stores the predetermined addition update amount as a specified addition update amount (winning opening information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16. ), Processing for transmitting the prescribed addition update amount to the game point processing means is performed (FIG. 63: winning opening information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17).

  According to the above configuration, the amount of game points to be added and updated in accordance with the occurrence of a winning is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has been generated, and the game control means can determine the predetermined addition. The update amount is stored as the specified addition update amount, and the specified addition update amount is transmitted to the game point processing means on the game frame side. Therefore, the game point processing means receiving it determines whether or not the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means is an appropriate size based on the prescribed addition update amount. It becomes possible. Originally, the addition update amount specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means based on the occurrence of the winning is consistent with the prescribed addition update amount, but the addition transmitted from the game control means If the update information itself is fraudulent, the consistency between the two cannot be achieved, and the suitability determination means determines that the size is not appropriate, and it is possible to deal with fraud.

  (8-10) The gaming component of (8-9) above, wherein the gaming control means transmits a specified addition update amount when the gaming machine is powered on (S651).

  According to the above configuration, the specified addition update amount transmitted when the power is turned on is stored on the game point processing means side on the game frame side, and the addition specified by the addition update information transmitted from the game control means thereafter. In order to be able to determine whether or not the update amount is an appropriate size based on the stored specified addition update amount, the game control means also determines the specified addition update amount each time the addition update amount is transmitted. This eliminates the need for transmission, thereby reducing the control burden on the game control means.

  (8-11) The game component according to (8-9) or (8-10), wherein the game control means includes game control means identification information for identifying the game control means, and the game point processing means. The process to transmit to (S651).

  According to the configuration described above, the storage means on the game frame side can store the game control means identification information transmitted from the game control means. Then, the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount transmitted from the game control means are compared with the game control means identification information and the prescribed addition update amount stored in the storage means, and the game control means identification information is Abnormality can be determined when they match but the specified addition update amount does not match. As a result, when the game parts are exchanged together with the game control means and a new game part is attached to the game frame, it is determined that the game control means identification information does not match, but the game control means identification information matches. When such exchange has not been performed and the specified addition update amount transmitted from the same game control means does not match the stored additional addition update amount, the specification transmitted to the game point processing means Since it is assumed that the addition update amount itself has been fraudulent and an abnormality determination is made in such a case, it is possible to cope with fraudulent acts with respect to the specified addition update amount itself.

(8-12) The gaming component according to any one of (8-9) to (8-11) above, wherein a high winning state in which a winning occurrence probability is improved by satisfying a predetermined gaming condition is continued a plurality of times. The number of continuations of the high winning state in the specific gaming state is predetermined (15 times in FIG. 64 (b)),
The game control means stores the predetermined number of consecutive high winning states as a predetermined number of times (the winning slot information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16). (Stored), a process of transmitting the specified number of continuous times to the game point processing means is also performed (S651).

  According to said structure, the memory | storage means by the side of a game frame can also memorize | store the regulation continuation number transmitted from the game control means. Then, the high winning state is continued for the prescribed number of times of continuous, and the addition update amount is generally increased during that period. Then, on the game frame side, in order to determine whether or not the increase state of the received addition update amount is consistent with the prescribed continuous number stored in the storage means, the additive update amount increases beyond the prescribed continuous number of times. An inconsistent state such as a state can be determined abnormally.

(9-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game with a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points when a winning occurs.
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81);
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the game points into predetermined points (balls, points);
Conversion display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points to the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
Display means (dollar box display of FIG. 43, FIG. 67) for performing display based on the game points given up to the present time after the player started the game with the gaming machine.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide. In addition, since the display based on the game points given to the present time after the player started the game with the gaming machine, the profits earned up to the present time since the player started the game can be visually recognized. This improves the convenience of the player.

(9-2) In the gaming system of (9-1), conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout) that converts the gaming points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operating means. A control unit 171 and a CU control unit 323),
The display means is calculated by subtracting the points possessed by the player from the start of the game by the gaming machine to the sum of the points and game points converted by the conversion processing means. The profit (cumulative number of accumulated balls−total number of subtracted balls) is displayed (FIG. 43).

  According to the above configuration, the game is obtained by subtracting the points owned by the player from the start of the game by the gaming machine to the sum of the points and game points converted by the conversion processing means. It is possible to accurately calculate the profits obtained from the start to the present time, and display the accurate profits.

(9-3) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with game point storage means (game ball counter of FIG. 6, game score counter of FIG. 81) for storing predetermined game points awarded by the occurrence of winning. A game unit (CU) that includes a connection unit (connector) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (P unit, S unit), and enables a game in the gaming machine;
Conversion display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the gaming points to the holding points based on detection of a conversion operation for converting the gaming points into predetermined holding points. ,
Display means (dollar box display of FIG. 43, FIG. 67) for performing display based on the game points given up to the present time after the player started the game with the gaming machine.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide. In addition, since the display based on the game points given to the present time after the player started the game with the gaming machine, the profits earned up to the present time since the player started the game can be visually recognized. This improves the convenience of the player.

(9-4) In the gaming apparatus of (9-3) above, conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout) that converts the gaming points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operating means. A control unit 171 and a CU control unit 323),
The display means is calculated by subtracting the points possessed by the player from the start of the game by the gaming machine to the sum of the points and game points converted by the conversion processing means. The profit (cumulative number of accumulated balls−total number of subtracted balls) is displayed (FIG. 43).

  According to the above configuration, the game is obtained by subtracting the points owned by the player from the start of the game by the gaming machine to the sum of the points and game points converted by the conversion processing means. It is possible to accurately calculate the profits obtained from the start to the present time, and display the accurate profits.

(10-1) The present invention is a gaming system for enabling a game by a gaming machine (P units, S units) that grants predetermined game points by the occurrence of a prize,
First conversion operation means (replay button 319) for converting player-owned points into the game points;
First conversion processing means (FIG. 37, payout control section 171 and CU control section 323) for performing processing for converting the points to the game points based on the detection of the operation of the first conversion operation means; ,
Second conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into the possession points;
Second conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control section 171 and CU control section 323) for performing processing for converting the gaming points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the second conversion operation means; ,
First conversion operation invalidating means (S684) for invalidating the operation of the first conversion operation means during the execution of the conversion process by the second conversion processing means.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide. Further, since the operation of the first conversion operation means is invalidated during the execution of the conversion process by the second conversion processing means, the points are converted into game points during the process of converting the game points into points. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that the processing is not performed and the point is difficult to understand.

(10-2) According to another aspect of the present invention, it is possible to play a game using a gaming machine (P, S) that updates a predetermined game point by using the game and adds and updates a score by generating a prize. A gaming system for
First conversion operation means (replay button 319) for converting player-owned points into the game points;
First conversion processing means (FIG. 37, payout control section 171 and CU control section 323) for performing processing for converting the points to the game points based on the detection of the operation of the first conversion operation means; ,
Second conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into the possession points;
Second conversion processing means (FIG. 41, payout control section 171 and CU control section 323) for performing processing for converting the gaming points into the holding points based on the detection of the operation of the second conversion operation means; ,
A second conversion operation invalidating unit (S698) for invalidating the operation of the second conversion operation unit during execution of the process by the first conversion processing unit;

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide. Further, since the operation of the second conversion operation means is invalidated during the conversion process by the first conversion processing means, the game points are converted into points during the process of converting the points to game points. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that the processing is not performed and the point is difficult to understand.

  (10-3) In the gaming system according to (10-1), first invalidation processing notifying means for notifying that invalidation processing by the first conversion operation invalidating means has been executed (the replay button 319 is depressed) When the operation is invalidated, the message display of “the operation of the replay button is invalidated because the counting process is in progress” may be performed by the indicators 54, 312 and the like.

  According to the above configuration, since it is notified that the invalidation process by the first conversion operation invalidating unit has been executed, the player can recognize that the operation of the first conversion operation unit has been invalidated. .

  (10-4) In the gaming system of (10-2) above, second invalidation processing notifying means for notifying that invalidation processing by the second conversion operation invalidating means has been executed (operation in which the count button 28 is pressed down) Is displayed on the display units 54, 312 and the like, the message “The operation of the counting button is invalidated because the ball lending process from holding balls and storage balls is in progress.” Including.

  According to the above configuration, since it is notified that the invalidation process by the second conversion operation invalidating unit has been executed, the player can recognize that the operation of the second conversion operation unit has been invalidated. .

  (10-5) In the gaming system according to any one of (10-1) to (10-4), based on the detection of the operation of the second conversion operation means, the holding points of the gaming points It further includes display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing conversion display.

  According to the above configuration, since the player displays the conversion of the game points to the holding points by operating the second conversion operation means, there is a state in which the game media obtained by the game are being counted. It becomes closer to the conventional gaming system that can be visually recognized, and it is possible to more reliably prevent confusion of players who are used to the conventional gaming system.

(10-6) According to another aspect of the present invention, the game machine includes a connection unit configured to be communicably connected to a gaming machine (P, S) that gives a predetermined game point when a winning is generated. A gaming device (CU) for enabling the game of
Based on the detection of a first conversion operation (depressing the replay button 319) for converting a player-owned score into the game score, a first conversion is performed for converting the score into the game score. Processing means (FIG. 37, CU control unit 323);
Second conversion processing means for performing a process of converting the gaming points into the holding points based on detection of a second conversion operation (depressing the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points into the holding points. (FIG. 41, CU control unit 323),
First conversion operation invalidating means (S684) for invalidating the first conversion operation during the execution of the conversion processing by the second conversion processing means.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide. Further, since the operation of the first conversion operation means is invalidated during the execution of the conversion process by the second conversion processing means, the points are converted into game points during the process of converting the game points into points. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that the processing is not performed and the point is difficult to understand.

(10-7) Another aspect of the present invention includes a connection unit (connector) for connecting to a gaming machine (P unit, S unit) that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs, so as to be able to communicate, A gaming device (CU) for enabling gaming on a gaming machine,
Based on the detection of a first conversion operation (depressing the replay button 319) for converting a player-owned score into the game score, a first conversion is performed for converting the score into the game score. Processing means (FIG. 37, CU control unit 323);
Second conversion processing means for performing a process of converting the gaming points into the holding points based on detection of a second conversion operation (depressing the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points into the holding points. (FIG. 41, CU control unit 323),
Second conversion operation invalidating means (S698) for invalidating the second conversion operation during the execution of the conversion processing by the first conversion processing means.

  According to said structure, the step which converts the game point obtained by the game into a point once by operation of a player arises. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide. Further, since the operation of the second conversion operation means is invalidated during the conversion process by the first conversion processing means, the game points are converted into points during the process of converting the points to game points. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that the processing is not performed and the point is difficult to understand.

  (10-8) In the gaming apparatus of (10-6) above, first invalidation processing notifying means (notifying that the replay button 319 is pushed down) for notifying that invalidation processing by the first conversion operation invalidating means has been executed. When the operation is invalidated, the message display of “the operation of the replay button is invalidated because the counting process is in progress” may be performed by the indicators 54, 312 and the like.

  According to the above configuration, since it is notified that the invalidation process by the first conversion operation invalidating unit has been executed, the player can recognize that the operation of the first conversion operation unit has been invalidated. .

  (10-9) In the gaming apparatus of (10-7) above, second invalidation processing notifying means for notifying that invalidation processing by the second conversion operation invalidating means has been executed (operation in which the count button 28 is depressed) Is displayed on the display units 54, 312 and the like, the message “The operation of the counting button is invalidated because the ball lending process from holding balls and storage balls is in progress.” Including.

  According to the above configuration, since it is notified that the invalidation process by the second conversion operation invalidating unit has been executed, the player can recognize that the operation of the second conversion operation unit has been invalidated. .

  (10-10) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (10-6) to (10-9), the gaming point is converted into the holding point based on the detection of the second conversion operation. It further includes display means (displays 54, 312, and 510) for performing display.

  According to the above configuration, since the player displays the conversion of the game points to the holding points by operating the second conversion operation means, there is a state in which the game media obtained by the game are being counted. It becomes closer to the conventional gaming system that can be visually recognized, and it is possible to more reliably prevent confusion of players who are used to the conventional gaming system.

(11-1) The present invention relates to a specific display result (for example, glance, role, etc.) in which the display result of variable display of identification information in the variable display device (variable display device 278, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is predetermined. A game machine (P 2 and S 2S) that shifts to a specific gaming state (big win state, winning) that is advantageous to the player when the combination of symbols is established, and is communicably connected to the gaming machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3),
The gaming machine is
A display device (display devices 54, 510) different from the variable display device;
Transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting variable display information in the variable display device (game information / type information in FIG. 15) to the game device;
The gaming device is:
Display control means for controlling the display device to variably display predetermined information based on the variable display information transmitted from the transmission means, and for performing the effect control of the type selected by the operation of selecting the effect type. Display control unit 350, S810 to S815, S820 to S825),
Receiving means (S800, S801, S803, S806) for receiving image data necessary for presentation control of the display device from a server,
The display control means performs effect control using the image data received by the receiving means (S820).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming device connected to be able to communicate with the gaming machine receives the image data from the server, a security problem occurs when the image data is distributed to the gaming machine. And the processing speed of the gaming machine can be secured. In addition, since the display device that performs the effect display using the image data received from the server is provided in the gaming machine, the display device does not greatly change the line of sight of the player playing the game on the gaming machine. Can be visually recognized, and the player's attention can be effectively drawn by the display on the display device. Furthermore, since the types of effects selected by the operation of selecting the types of effects are displayed on the display device, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects on the display device.

  (11-2) In the gaming system according to (11-1), the display control unit performs control for causing the display device to display a display result corresponding to a display result of variable display of identification information in the variable display device. It includes correspondence result display control means (S822 to S825).

  According to such a configuration, since the display result corresponding to the display result of the variable display device is displayed on the display device, the display results of the variable display device and the display device can be made consistent and variable. The display device and the display device can be linked to each other.

(11-3) In the gaming system according to (11-1), the display control unit is configured such that when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device is an outlier display result other than the specific display result. And winning display control means (S835, S836) for controlling the display device to display a display result indicating that a predetermined lottery has been won,
The gaming device controls to give a predetermined content to the player when a display result indicating that a predetermined lottery is won is displayed on the display device (S837).

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the game of the gaming machine itself, the player's attention can be drawn and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (11-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (11-1) to (11-3), the display control means is configured such that the variable display history in the variable display device is a predetermined condition (for example, the number of variable display is 10). When the second time is reached, variable display of the predetermined information on the display device is started (S814).

  According to such a configuration, since the variable display history in the variable display device satisfies the predetermined condition, the variable display of the predetermined information by the display device is started, so that it is possible to prevent the customer from leaving.

  (11-5) In the gaming system according to any one of (11-1) to (11-4), the gaming device corresponds to a manufacturer of the gaming machine at the time of initial connection with the gaming machine. Distribution request means for requesting the server to distribute image data (display data acquisition sequence in FIG. 33, S800) is included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that other control processing of the gaming apparatus is delayed when image data is distributed as needed.

  (11-6) In the gaming system according to any one of (11-1) to (11-5), the gaming device is configured to perform the first connection with the gaming machine according to a model of the gaming machine. A model-compatible process for controlling the display device is executed (S807).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to apply an effect according to the model of the gaming machine as a result of the model corresponding process, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

  (11-7) In the gaming system according to (11-1) to (11-6), the gaming device requests control data of the display device corresponding to a model of the gaming machine to the server. (Display data including the model-compatible data shown in FIG. 76 is requested to the security center server 802 in S803).

  According to such a configuration, the display device control data corresponding to the gaming machine model can be downloaded from the server to the gaming device, and the display device corresponding to the gaming machine model can be controlled. Can be improved.

  (11-8) In the gaming system according to any one of (11-1) to (11-7), the gaming device sets control data for the display device corresponding to a model of the gaming machine. (Scalar setting by S807, etc.)

  According to such a configuration, the game device can control the display device after setting the control data for the display device corresponding to the model of the gaming machine, and an effect according to the model of the gaming machine can be provided. It can be applied and the production effect can be improved.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control board, 26 game board, 54, 312 display, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit, 321 Lending button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 325 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result, and the gaming machine is connected to be communicable with the gaming machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device,
The gaming machine is
A display device different from the variable display device;
Transmission means for transmitting variable display information in the variable display device to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Display control means for performing control to variably display predetermined information on the display device based on variable display information transmitted from the transmission means, and to perform effect control of a type selected by an operation of selecting a type of effect; ,
Receiving means for receiving image data necessary for presentation control of the display device from a server,
The game system, wherein the display control means performs effect control using the image data received by the receiving means.

Images